Trane SCWF 35, SCWF 25, SCWF 42, SCWF 38, SCWF 52 Installation, Operation And Maintenance Manual

Installation, Operation, and Maintenance

IntelliPak™™ Commercial Self-Contained Signature Series

20 to 110 Tons

SSCCWWFF aanndd SSIIWWFF – 20 to 110 Ton SSCCRRFF aanndd SSIIRRFF – 25 to 60 Ton

SSAAFFEETTYY WWAARRNNIINNGG

Only qualified personnel should install and service the equipment. The installation, starting up, and servicing of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous and requires specific knowledge and training. Improperly installed, adjusted or altered equipment by an unqualified person could result in death or serious injury. When working on the equipment, observe all precautions in the literature and on the tags, stickers, and labels that are attached to the equipment.

June 2018

SSCCXXFF--SSVVXX0011QQ--EENN

Introduction

WARNING

CAU

TION

NOTICE

Read this manual thoroughly before operating or servicing this unit.

Warnings, Cautions, and Notices

Safety advisories appear throughout this manual as required. Your personal safety and the proper operation of this machine depend upon the strict observance of these precautions.

The three types of advisories are defined as follows:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It could also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or property-damage only accidents.

Important Environmental Concerns

Scientific research has shown that certain man-made chemicals can affect the earth’s naturally occurring stratospheric ozone layer when released to the atmosphere. In particular, several of the identified chemicals that may affect the ozone layer are refrigerants that contain Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon (CFCs) and those containing Hydrogen, Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon (HCFCs). Not all refrigerants containing these compounds have the same potential impact to the environment. Trane advocates the responsible handling of all refrigerants-including industry replacements for CFCs and HCFCs such as saturated or unsaturated HFCs and HCFCs.

Important Responsible Refrigerant Practices

Trane believes that responsible refrigerant practices are important to the environment, our customers, and the air conditioning industry. All technicians who handle refrigerants must be certified according to local rules. For the USA, the Federal Clean Air Act (Section

608) sets forth the requirements for handling, reclaiming, recovering and recycling of certain refrigerants and the equipment that is used in these service procedures. In addition, some states or municipalities may have additional requirements that must also be adhered to for responsible management of refrigerants. Know the applicable laws and follow them.

WWAARRNNIINNGG

PPrrooppeerr FFiieelldd WWiirriinngg aanndd GGrroouunnddiinngg RReeqquuiirreedd!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww ccooddee ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. AAllll ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg MMUUSSTT bbee ppeerrffoorrmmeedd bbyy qquuaalliiffiieedd ppeerrssoonnnneell.. IImmpprrooppeerrllyy iinnssttaalllleedd aanndd ggrroouunnddeedd ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg ppoosseess FFIIRREE aanndd EELLEECCTTRROOCCUUTTIIOONN hhaazzaarrddss.. TToo aavvooiidd tthheessee hhaazzaarrddss,, yyoouu MMUUSSTT ffoollllooww rreeqquuiirreemmeennttss ffoorr ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg iinnssttaallllaattiioonn aanndd ggrroouunnddiinngg aass ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn NNEECC aanndd yyoouurr llooccaall// ssttaattee//nnaattiioonnaall eelleeccttrriiccaall ccooddeess..

WWAARRNNIINNGG

PPeerrssoonnaall PPrrootteeccttiivvee EEqquuiippmmeenntt ((PPPPEE)) RReeqquuiirreedd!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo wweeaarr pprrooppeerr PPPPEE ffoorr tthhee jjoobb bbeeiinngg uunnddeerrttaakkeenn ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. TTeecchhnniicciiaannss,, iinn oorrddeerr ttoo pprrootteecctt tthheemmsseellvveess ffrroomm ppootteennttiiaall eelleeccttrriiccaall,, mmeecchhaanniiccaall,, aanndd cchheemmiiccaall hhaazzaarrddss,, MMUUSSTT ffoollllooww pprreeccaauuttiioonnss iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaall aanndd oonn tthhee ttaaggss,, ssttiicckkeerrss,, aanndd llaabbeellss,, aass wweellll aass tthhee iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww::

•• BBeeffoorree iinnssttaalllliinngg//sseerrvviicciinngg tthhiiss uunniitt,, tteecchhnniicciiaannss MMUUSSTT ppuutt oonn aallll PPPPEE rreeqquuiirreedd ffoorr tthhee wwoorrkk bbeeiinngg uunnddeerrttaakkeenn ((EExxaammpplleess;; ccuutt rreessiissttaanntt gglloovveess//sslleeeevveess,, bbuuttyyll gglloovveess,, ssaaffeettyy ggllaasssseess,, hhaarrdd hhaatt//bbuummpp ccaapp,, ffaallll pprrootteeccttiioonn,, eelleeccttrriiccaall PPPPEE aanndd aarrcc ffllaasshh ccllootthhiinngg)).. AALLWWAAYYSS rreeffeerr ttoo aapppprroopprriiaattee MMaatteerriiaall SSaaffeettyy DDaattaa SShheeeettss ((MMSSDDSS))//SSaaffeettyy DDaattaa SShheeeettss ((SSDDSS)) aanndd OOSSHHAA gguuiiddeelliinneess ffoorr pprrooppeerr PPPPEE..

•• WWhheenn wwoorrkkiinngg wwiitthh oorr aarroouunndd hhaazzaarrddoouuss cchheemmiiccaallss,, AALLWWAAYYSS rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee MMSSDDSS//SSDDSS aanndd OOSSHHAA//GGHHSS ((GGlloobbaall HHaarrmmoonniizzeedd SSyysstteemm ooff CCllaassssiiffiiccaattiioonn aanndd LLaabbeelllliinngg ooff CChheemmiiccaallss)) gguuiiddeelliinneess ffoorr iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn oonn aalllloowwaabbllee ppeerrssoonnaall eexxppoossuurree lleevveellss,, pprrooppeerr rreessppiirraattoorryy pprrootteeccttiioonn aanndd hhaannddlliinngg iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss..

•• IIff tthheerree iiss aa rriisskk ooff eenneerrggiizzeedd eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoonnttaacctt,, aarrcc,, oorr ffllaasshh,, tteecchhnniicciiaannss MMUUSSTT ppuutt oonn aallll PPPPEE iinn aaccccoorrddaannccee wwiitthh OOSSHHAA,, NNFFPPAA 7700EE,, oorr ootthheerr ccoouunnttrryy--ssppeecciiffiicc rreeqquuiirreemmeennttss ffoorr aarrcc ffllaasshh pprrootteeccttiioonn,, PPRRIIOORR ttoo sseerrvviicciinngg tthhee uunniitt.. NNEEVVEERR PPEERRFFOORRMM AANNYY SSWWIITTCCHHIINNGG,, DDIISSCCOONNNNEECCTTIINNGG,, OORR VVOOLLTTAAGGEE TTEESSTTIINNGG WWIITTHHOOUUTT PPRROOPPEERR EELLEECCTTRRIICCAALL PPPPEE AANNDD AARRCC FFLLAASSHH CCLLOOTTHHIINNGG.. EENNSSUURREE EELLEECCTTRRIICCAALL MMEETTEERRSS AANNDD EEQQUUIIPPMMEENNTT AARREE PPRROOPPEERRLLYY RRAATTEEDD FFOORR IINNTTEENNDDEEDD VVOOLLTTAAGGEE..

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn

WWAARRNNIINNGG

FFoollllooww EEHHSS PPoolliicciieess!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy..

•• AAllll IInnggeerrssoollll RRaanndd ppeerrssoonnnneell mmuusstt ffoollllooww IInnggeerrssoollll RRaanndd EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall,, HHeeaalltthh aanndd SSaaffeettyy ((EEHHSS)) ppoolliicciieess wwhheenn ppeerrffoorrmmiinngg wwoorrkk ssuucchh aass hhoott wwoorrkk,, eelleeccttrriiccaall,, ffaallll pprrootteeccttiioonn,, lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt,, rreeffrriiggeerraanntt hhaannddlliinngg,, eettcc.. AAllll ppoolliicciieess ccaann bbee ffoouunndd oonn tthhee BBOOSS ssiittee.. WWhheerree llooccaall rreegguullaattiioonnss aarree mmoorree ssttrriinnggeenntt tthhaann tthheessee ppoolliicciieess,, tthhoossee rreegguullaattiioonnss ssuuppeerrsseeddee tthheessee ppoolliicciieess..

•• NNoonn--IInnggeerrssoollll RRaanndd ppeerrssoonnnneell sshhoouulldd aallwwaayyss ffoollllooww llooccaall rreegguullaattiioonnss..

Copyright

This document and the information in it are the property of Trane, and may not be used or reproduced in whole or in part without written permission. Trane reserves the right to revise this publication at any time, and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any person of such revision or change.

Trademarks

All trademarks referenced in this document are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Revision History

• Running edits included.

• Updated motor electrical data.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

3

Table of Contents

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

R-410A Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Signature Series Self-Contained Unit

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Standard Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Human Interface Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Unit Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Optional Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Unit Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Model Number Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Commercial Self-Contained Signature

Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Commercial Self-Contained Air-Cooled

Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

General Data . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . 14

Pre-Installation . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Receiving Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Contractor Installation

Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Unit Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Unit Protective Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Supply Fan Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Dimensional Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 24

Steam and Hot Water Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Steam Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Hot Water Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Plenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Airside Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Service Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Weights . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Installation - Mechanical. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Unit Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Installation Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Unit Vibration Isolator Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Unit Isolator Installation

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Duct Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Installing the Plenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Installing the Airside Economizer . . . . . . . . . 37

Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Condenser Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Condensate Drain Connections. . . . . . . . 38

General Waterside Recommendations for Cooling

Towers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Waterside Piping Arrangements. . . . . . . 39

Water Temperature

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Water Piping Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Installating the Hydronic Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Steam and Hot Water Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Refrigerant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Interconnecting Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Preliminary Refrigerant

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Installation - Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 43

Unit Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Supply Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Voltage Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Voltage Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Phase Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Control Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Selection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Static Pressure Transducer Installation

(VAV units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Transducer Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Installing the Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Zone Sensor Options for Control

Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Standard with All Units:

BAYSENS077 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

CV Unit Zone Sensor Options . . . . . . . . . 47

Integrated Comfort Systems Sensors for

CV and VAV Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

CV and VAV Unit Zone Sensor

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Zone Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Mounting Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Mounting the Subbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

TTaabbllee ooff CCoonntteennttss

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Standard Remote Sensor

(BAYSENS077) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Programmable Zone Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

BAYSENS119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Time Clock Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Grasslin Time Clock Option . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Installing the Time Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Surface Mounting Inside Panel . . . . . . . . 50

Wiring the Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Remote Human Interface Panel

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Human Interface (HI) Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Remote Human Interface Panel. . . . . . . . 51

Location Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 51

Ambient Temperature and Humidity

Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Mounting the Remote Human Interface

(RHI) Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Wall Mounting the RHI Panel. . . . . . . . . . 52

Wiring the Remote Human Interface. . . . . . . 53

Low Voltage (AC) Field Wiring

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Interprocessor Communication

Bridge Module Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Communication Link (Shielded

Twisted Pair) Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

At the Self-Contained Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Connecting to Tracer Summit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Communication Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Programming the Time Clock

Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Setting the Time Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Programming the Time Clock . . . . . . . . . 55

Reviewing and Changing

Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Operating Principles. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Control Sequences of Operation . . . . . . . . . . 57

Occupied/Unoccupied

Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Field-Supplied Occupied/

Unoccupied Input on the RTM. . . . . . . . . 57

Tracer Summit System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Factory-Mounted Time Clock. . . . . . . . . . 57

Unoccupied Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . 57

Morning Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Full Capacity Morning Warm-up

(MWU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Cycling Capacity Morning Warm-up

(MWU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Timed Override Activation—

ICS™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Timed Override Activation—Non-

ICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

VAV Drive Max Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Occupied Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Occupied Zone Temperature—

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Zone Temperature Control (Unit

Model Number Digit 9 = 4 or 5) . . . . . . . . 58

Supply Air Temperature Control (Unit Model Number Digit 9 = 1, 2, 3,

or 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Units With Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Cooling/Waterside Economizer. . . . . . . . 59

Cooling/Airside Economizer. . . . . . . . . . . 59

Mechanical Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Air-Cooled Units Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Water-Cooled Units Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Auto Changeover (Units with Heat

Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Occupied Zone Temperature—

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Electric Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Hydronic Heat: Hot Water or

Steam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Supply Air Setpoint Reset (VAV Units

Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Reset Based on Outdoor

AirTemperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Reset Based on zone

temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Supply AirTempering (Hot Water

and Steam VAV Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Daytime Warm-up (Units with Supply Air Temperature Control

Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Supply AirTempering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

5

TTaabbllee ooff CCoonntteennttss

Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Thermostatic Expansion Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Compressor Cycling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Compressor Lead/Lag

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Step Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Compressor Safety Devices. . . . . . . . . . . 62

Low Ambient Compressor

Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Evaporator Coil Frost Protection

FROSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Service Valve Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Waterside Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Water Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Water Piping Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Basic Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Intermediate Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Water Flow Switch Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Water-Cooled Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Waterside Economizer Option. . . . . . . . . 63

Waterside Economizer Flow

Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Constant Water Flow with

Intermediate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Variable Water Flow with

Intermediate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Unit Airside Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Supply Air Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Low Entering Air Temperature

Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

High Duct Temperature

Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Dirty Filter Sensor Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Low Ambient Sensor (Air-Cooled

Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Supply Air Static Pressure Limit . . . . . . . 65

Variable Frequency Drive

Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

VFD with Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Airside Economizer Option . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Comparative Enthalpy Control . . . . . . . . 66

Airside Economizers with Traq

Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Standard Two-Position Damper

Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Airside Economizer Interface. . . . . . . . . . 67

Airside Economizer Interface with

Comparative Enthalpy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Air-Cooled Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Controls . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Points List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

RTM Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

GBAS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

ECEM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

BCI-I option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

LCI-I Points List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Phase Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Unit Control Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

RTM Module Board—Standard on all

Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Compressor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Human Interface Module—Standard

on all Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Remote Human Interface Module

Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Waterside Module—Standard on All

Water-cooled Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Heat Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Ventilation Override Module (VOM)

Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Trane Communications

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy

Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Ventilation Control Module

(VCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Generic Building Automation

System Module Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Input Devices and System

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Pre-Startup . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Units with VFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Pre-Startup Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Supply Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Water-Cooled Unit Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Air-Cooled Units Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

6

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

TTaabbllee ooff CCoonntteennttss

Units with Hydronic Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Units with Electric Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Startup . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 81

Air-Cooled Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Final Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Operating & Programming

Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Startup Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Maintenance . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . 85

Service Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) . . . . . . . 85

Air Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Inspecting and Cleaning the Drain

Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan . . . . . . . . . . 87

Supply Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Fan Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Fan Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Fan Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Measuring Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Adjusting Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Scroll Compressor Failure Diagnosis

and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

40 Ton Air-Cooled Compressor

Suction Restrictor Replacement . . . . . . . 91

Refrigerant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Refrigerant Leak Test Procedure. . . . . . . 92

Brazing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

System Evacuation Procedures . . . . . . . 93

Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Scroll Compressor Failure Diagnosis

and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Cleaning Coil Fin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Inspecting and Cleaning Coils . . . . . . . . . 97

Steam and Hot Water Coils . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Refrigerant Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Draining the Waterside Economizer

Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Cleaning the Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Chemical Cleaning of Condenser and

Economizer Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Piping Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Water Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Maintenance Periodic Checklists . . . . . . . . . . 99

Monthly Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Semi-Annual Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . 100

Annual Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 101

Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Additional Diagnostic Resources. . . . . . . . . 102

Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

7

Overview

NNoottee:: One copy of this document ships inside the

control panel of each unit and is customer property. It must be retained by the unit’s maintenance personnel.

This manual describes proper installation, operation, and maintenance procedures for air cooled systems. By carefully reviewing the information within this manual and following the instructions, the risk of improper operation and/or component damage will be minimized. It is important that periodic maintenance be performed to help assure trouble free operation. A maintenance schedule is provided at the end of this manual. Should equipment failure occur, contact a qualified service organization with qualified, experienced HVAC technicians to properly diagnose and repair this equipment.

This manual covers installation, operation and maintenance of 20-110 ton Signature Series Commercial Self Contained products with R-410A refrigerant.

R-410A Compressors

• Use crank case heaters which must be energized 24 hours prior to compressor start.

• Contain POE oil which readily absorbs potentially damaging moisture from air.

• Control box includes a phase monitor to detect phase loss, line voltage imbalance and reversal.

Refer to previous IOM versions for R-407C and R-22 units, or contact your local Trane representative.

Refer to the appropriate IOM for air-cooled condenser CXRC-SVX01*-EN and programming IntelliPak™ controls PKG-SVP01*-EN.

Signature Series Self-Contained Unit Components

Commercial self-contained units are complete HVAC systems used in floor-by-floor applications. Units are easy to install because they feature:

• A single point power connection.

• Factory-installed and tested controls.

• A single water point connection.

• Factory-installed options.

• An internally trapped drain connection.

NNoottee:: Refer to the following figure for typical unit

components.

The hermetically sealed scroll compressor motors utilize internal motor protection and time delays to prevent excessive cycling.

Water-cooled units have 2-6 refrigerant circuits and ship with a full refrigerant and oil charge. Each circuit includes filter drier, pressure relief valve, sight glass/ moisture indicator, thermal expansion valve with sensing bulb and external equalizing line, discharge line schrader valve, suction line schrader valve and high and low pressure cutout switches. The watercooled condensers are shell and tube type with an internal subcooler. Condensers are available as mechanically or chemically cleanable.

Air-cooled units have two circuits and ship with oil and a dry nitrogen holding charge. Therefore, air-cooled units require field piping refrigerant connections to an air-cooled condensing unit and charging. Each circuit includes filter drier (field installed), sight glass/ moisture indicator, thermal expansion valve with sensing bulb and external equalizing line, discharge line schrader valve, suction line schrader valve, high and low pressure cutout switches, discharge line check valve and liquid line solenoid valve.

All units include liquid line service valves for each circuit as standard (suction and discharge service valves are optional).

Evaporator fans are double width, double inlet and forward curved with fixed pitch belt drive assembly. Variable frequency drives are optional. EISA efficiency open drip proof (ODP) and totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor options are available.

8

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Figure 1. Commercial self-contained signature series unit components

Waterside economizer (cleanable option shown)

Sight glasses with ports for viewing while unit is running

Unit mounted microprocessor control with easy-to-read human interface panel

Swing out VFO panel with Tri-VFO for efficient VAV operation

Trane 3-D® Scroll Compressor for reliability, efficiency and

quiet operation Two-bolt connection on cleanable condenser for quick, easy maintenance

Waterside valve package option to enhance system efficiency

Internally trapped drain for low cost installation

2-inch flat filter box inside unit casing

OOvveerrvviieeww

Standard Controls

Standard controls supplied with the unit include the human interface (HI) panel with unit control module (UCM). All basic setup parameters are preset from the factory.

Human Interface Panel

The HI is unit mounted and accessible without opening the unit’s front panel. It allows easy setpoint adjustment using the HI keypad. In addition, the HI displays all unit operating parameters and conditions in a clear language display, which can be configured for either English, French, or Spanish.

The optional remote human interface (RHI) will control up to four self-contained units, each containing an interprocessor communications bridge (IPCB). It has all the same features as the unit-mounted HI except for the service mode.

For more information on setpoint defaults and ranges and unit programming, see the Self-Contained Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01*-EN. A copy ships with each unit.

Unit Control Module

The UCM provides “smart” unit control with safety features and control relays for pumps, dampers, etc.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

The Signature Series self-contained unit is controlled by a microelectronic control system that consists of a network of modules. Modular Series self-contained unit is controlled by microelectronic control system consisting of a network of modules.These modules are referred to as unit control modules (UCM). In this manual, the acronym UCM refers to the entire control system network.

These modules perform specific unit functions using proportional/integral control algorithms. They are mounted in the unit control panel and are factory wired to their respective internal components. Each module receives and interprets information from other unit modules, sensors, remote panels, and customer binary contacts to satisfy the applicable request; i.e., economizing, mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation.

See the Owner’s section of this manual for a detailed description of each module’s function.

9

OOvveerrvviieeww

Figure 2. Right side view of unit Optional Controls

Optional controls include a disconnect switch, dirty filter switch, water flow switch (water-cooled only), supply air temperature reset, or external setpoint inputs. Daytime heating is available on units with electric, steam, or hot water heat control options. Morning warm-up operation is available on all units.

The static pressure probe, zone night heat/morning warm-up, supply air temperature reset sensor options ship separate inside the unit control panel for field installation. For more detailed information on the unit control options, see the Owner’s section of this manual.

Unit Nameplate

The unit nameplate identifies the unit model number, appropriate service literature, and wiring diagram numbers. It is mounted on the left end of the unit control panel.

10

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Model Number Description

Commercial Self-Contained Signature Series

Digit 1 — Unit Model

S = Self-Contained

Digit 2 — Unit Type

C = Commercial I = Industrial

Digit 3 — Condenser Medium

W = Water-cooled R = Air-cooled

Digit 4 — Development Sequence

F = Signature Series

Digit 5— Refrigerant Circuit Configuration

U = Standard Capacity V = High Capacity

Digit 6, 7 — Unit Nominal Capacity

20 = 20 Tons (water only) 22 = 22 Tons (water only) 25 = 25 Tons (water or air) 29 = 29 Tone (water or air) 30 = 30 Tons (air only) 32 = 32 Tons (water only) 35 = 35 Tons (water or air) 38 = 38 Tons (water only) 40 = 40 Tons (air only) 42 = 42 Tons (water only) 46 = 46 Tons (water only) 50 = 50 Tons (air only) 52 = 52 Tons (water only) 58 = 58 Tons (water only) 60 = 60 Tons (air only) 65 = 65 Tons (water only) 72 = 72 Tons (water only) 80 = 80 Tons (water only) 90 = 90 Tons (water only) C0 = 100 Tons (water only) C1 = 110 Tons (water only)

Digit 8 — Unit Voltage

6 = 200 volt/60 hz/3 ph 4 = 460 volt/60 hz/3 ph 5 = 575 volt/60 hz/3 ph

Digit 9 — Air Volume/Temp Control

2 = VFD and supply air temp ctrl 3 = VFD w/ bypass and supply air temp ctrl 4 = Constant volume, zone temp cool only 5 = Constant volume, w/ zone temp heat/

cool

6 = Constant volume and supply air temp ctrl

Digit 10, 11 — Design Sequence

** = Factory Assigned

Digit 12 — Unit Construction

A = Vertical discharge B = Vertical discharge with double wall

Digit 13— Flexible Horizontal Discharge Plenum Type

B = STD plenum w/ factory-cut holes C = Low plenum w/ factory-cut holes E = Std plenum w/ field-cut holes F = Low plenum w/ field-cut holes H = STD plenum double wall w/ field-cut

holes

J = Low plenum double wall w/ field-cut holes K = Extended height plenum w/factory-cut

holes, ship separate L = STD plenum w/factory-cut holes, ship

separate M = Low plenum w/factory-cut holes, ship separate N = Extended height plenum w/field-cut holes, ship separate P = STD plenum w/field-cut holes, ship

separate R = Low plenum w/field-cut holes, ship

separate T = Extended height double-wall plenum w/ field-cut holes, ship separate U = STD double-wall plenum w/field-cut

holes, ship separate V = Low double-wall plenum w/field-cut

holes, ship separate W = STD double-wall (perf) plenum w/fieldcut holes (90 to110 ton only) X = Low double-wall (perf) plenum w/field-

cut holes (90 to 110 ton only) Y = Extended height double-wall (perf)

plenum w/field-cut holes, ship separate (90 to 110 ton only)

0 = None

Digit 14— Motor Type

2 = ODP motor 4 = TEFC motor

Digit 15, 16 — Motor HP

05 = 5 hp 07 = 7.5 hp 10 = 10 hp 15 = 15 hp 20 = 20 hp 25 = 25 hp 30 = 30 hp 40 = 40 hp 50 = 50 hp (460V, 575V only) 60 = 60 hp (90 to 110 ton only)

Digit 17, 18, 19 – Fan RPM

040 = 400 rpm 045 = 450 rpm 050 = 500 rpm 052 = 525 rpm 055 = 550 rpm 057 = 575 rpm 060 = 600 rpm 065 = 650 rpm 070 = 700 rpm 075 = 750 rpm 080 = 800 rpm 085 = 850 rpm 090 = 900 rpm 095 = 950 rpm 100 = 1000rpm 105 = 1050 rpm 110 = 1100 rpm 115 = 1150 rpm 120 = 1200 rpm 125 = 1250 rpm 130 = 1300 rpm 135 = 1350 rpm

Digit 20 — Unit Isolators

A = Steam coil B = Hot water coil C = Electric heat, 1 stage D = Electric heat, 2 stage F = Hydronic heat ctrl interface G = Electric heat ctrl interface K = Steam coil ship separate, LH L= Hot water coil ship separate, LH T = Hot water coil, high capacity, LH U = Hot water coil, high capacity, LH, ship

separate

0 = None

Digit 21 — Unit Isolators

A = Isopads B = Spring isolators 0 = None

Digit 22— Unit Finish

1 = Paint - Slate Gray

Digit 23— Supply Fan Options

0 = Standard fan 1 = Low CFM fan

Digit 24— Unit Connection

1 = Disconnect switch 2 = Terminal block 3 = Dual point power (2 blocks)

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

11

MMooddeell NNuummbbeerr DDeessccrriippttiioonn

Digit 25— Industrial Options

A = Protective coating evaporator coil B = Silver solder C = Stainless steel screws D = A and B E = A and C F = B and C G = A, B, and C 0 = none

Digit 26 — Drain PanType

A = Galvanized sloped B = Stainless steel sloped

Digit 27 — Waterside Economizer

A = Mechanical clean full capacity (4-row) B = Mechanical clean low capacity (2-row) C = Chemical clean full capacity (4-row) D = Chemical clean low capacity (2-row) 0 = None

Digit 28 — Ventilation Control

B = Airside econ w/Traq damper, top O/A C = Airside econ w/ std damper, top O/A E = Airside econ w/Traq damper &

comparative enthalpy, top O/A F = Airside econ w/ std damper &

comparative enthalpy, top O/A

H = 2-position damper ventilation interface J = Airside economizer interface K = Airside economizer interface w/

comparative enthalpy

Digit 29 — Water Piping

D = Left hand basic piping F = Left hand Intermediate piping K = Left hand basic w/ flow switch M = Left hand intermediate w/ flow switch 0 = None

Digit 30 — Condenser Tube Type

A = Standard condenser tubes B = 90/10 CuNi condenser tubes 0 = None (air-cooled only)

Digit 31 — Compressor Service Valves

1 = With service valves 0 = None

Digit 32— Miscellaneous System Control

1 = Time clock 2 = Interface for remote HI (IPCB) 3 = Dirty filter switch 4 = 1 and 2 5 = 1 and 3 6 = 2 and 3 7 = 1, 2 and 3 0 = None

Digit 33 — Control Interface Options

A = Generic BAS Module; 0-5 VDC (GBAS) B = Ventilation Override Module (VOM) D = Remote Human Interface (RHI) G = GBAS and VOM H = GBAS and RHI J = VOM and RHI M = GBAS, VOM, and RHI N = BACnet Communications Interface (BCI) P = BCI and GBAS Q = BCI and VOM R = BCI and RHI T = BCI and GBAS and VOM U = BCI and GBAS and RHI V = BCI and VOM and RHI W = BCI and GBAS and VOM and RHI 0 = None 1 = Lontalk Comm5 Interface (LCI) 2 = LCI and GBAS 3 = LCI and VOM 4 = LCI and RHI 5 = LCI and GBAS and VOM 6 = LCI and GBAS and RHI 7 = LCI and VOM and RHI 8 = LCI and GBAS and VOM and RHI

Digit 34— Agency

U = UL agency listing 0 = None

Digit 35— Filter Type

1 = 2” T/A w/ 2” rack 2 = 2” med. eff. T/A w/ 2” rack 3 = 4” bolt-on rack w/ 2” med eff. filter 4 = 6” rack w/ 2” construction T/A pre-filter &

4” filter space 5 = 6” rack w/ 2” med. eff. T/A pre-filter & 4”

filter space

Digit 36— Miscellaneous Control Option

A = Low entering air temp. protect device

(LEATPD)

B = High duct temp t-stat, ship separate C = Plenum high static switch, ship separate E = A and B F = A and C H = B and C L = A, B, and C 0 = None

12

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Commercial Self-Contained Air-Cooled Condenser

MMooddeell NNuummbbeerr DDeessccrriippttiioonn

Digit 1 — Unit Model

C = Condenser

Digit 2 — Unit Type

C = Commercial I = Industrial

Digit 3 — Condenser Medium

R = Remote

Digit 4 — Development Sequence

C = C

Digit 5, 6, 7 — Nominal Capacity

020 = 20 Tons 029 = 29 Tons 035 = 35 Tons 040 = 40 Tons 050 = 50 Tons 060 = 60 Tons

Digit 8 — Unit Voltage

4 = 460 Volt/60 Hz/3 ph 5 = 575 Volt/60 Hz/3 ph 6 = 200 Volt/60 Hz/3 ph

Digit 12 — Unit Finish

1 = Paint — Slate Gray

Digit 13— Coil Options

A = Non-Coated Aluminum C = Protective Coating Aluminum

Digit 14— Unit Isolators

0 = None A = Spring Isolators B = Isopads

Digit 15— Panels

1 = Louvered Panels

Digit 16— Agency

0 = None U = With UL Listing

Digit 9 — Control Option

0 = No Low Ambient, IPak A = No Low Ambient, T-Stat* B = Low Ambient, IPak C = Low Ambient, T-Stat*

Note: *T-Stat only available on SCRG.

Digit 10, 11— Design Sequence

** = Factory Assigned

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

13

General Data

Table 1. SCWF/SIWF Water-cooled self-contained, 20 to 42 tons

Unit Size 20 22 25 29 32 35 38 42

Compressor Data

Quantity

Nominal Ton/comp

Evaporator Coil

Data

Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3

Rows 2 2 3 or 6 2 4 or 6 3 4 or 6 3

Sq. Ft.

Fpf

Condenser Data

Minimum Gpm w/o

Econ

Minimum Gpm w/

Econ

Maximum Gpm

Evaporator Fan

Data

Quantity

Diameter 18" 18" 18" 18" 18" 20" 20" 25"

Minimum Hp

Minimum Kw

Maximum Hp

Maximum Kw

Minimum Design Cfm

Maximum Design Cfm

High Capacity

Option

Rows

Optional Low Flow

Fan 6

Diameter

Min/max Design Cfm

Refrigerant Charge,

lbs. R-410A

(Standard

Capacity/High

Capacity)

Circuit A 19.5 19.5 21.5 24.7

Circuit B 19.5 19.5 21.5 20.5

Circuit C

2 2 2

10 10 10

21.81 21.81 21.81 29.98 29.98 31.35 31.35 38.57

144 144 144 144 144 144 144 144

36 36 36 46 46 54 54 64

41 41 41 60 60 65 65 64

80 80 80 102 102 119 119 142

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7. 5

(3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (5.39)

20 20 20 20 20 25 25 30

(14.91) (14.91) (14.91) (18.64) (18.64) (18.64) (18.64) (22.37)

6325 6325 6500 8700 8700 9100 9880 11200

8500 9350 10625 12325 13600 14875 16150 17850

N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

6

1/1 1/1

15/10 15/10

N/A

6

28.5/29.3

23.5/23.5

3 3

10 10

N/A

21.5

23.5/26.5

6

18”

6000/

10625

2/1

10/15

N/A

22.0

14

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

GGeenneerraall DDaattaa

Table 1. SCWF/SIWF Water-cooled self-contained, 20 to 42 tons (continued)

Unit Size 20 22 25 29 32 35 38 42

Capacity Steps - %

Notes:

1. Compressors are Trane 3-D™ scroll.

2. All units operate with R-410A. Units ships with full operating charge.

3. Maximum cfm limits are set to prevent moisture carryover on the evaporator coil.

4. Minimum cfm limits are set to ensure stable thermal expansion valve operation at low load conditions.

5. Optional low flow fan (unit model number digit 23 = 1) is available ONLY when High Capacity option is selected (unit model number digit 5 = V).

100/53/0 100/53/0 100/53/0

Table 2. SCWF/SIWF Water-cooled self-contained, 46-110 tons

Unit Size 46 52 58 65 72 80 90 100 110

Compressor

Data

Quantity

Nominal Ton/

Comp

Circuits 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 6

Evaporator Coil

Data

Rows 4 or 6 2 4 or 6 3 4 or 6 6 6 or 8 6 or 8 6 or 8

Sq. Ft.

FPF 144 144 144 144 144 144 144 144 144

Condenser Data

Min GPM w/o Econ

Min GPM w/ Econ

Maximum GPM 142 186 186 226 226 248 300 350 350

Evaporator Fan

Data

Quantity

Size (Dia.)

Minimum HP 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 15 15 15

Minimum kW

Maximum HP 30 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60

Maximum kW

Min Design CFM

Max Design CFM

High Capacity

Option

Rows 6

Optional Low

Flow Fan

Size (Dia.)

Min./Max Design

CFM

2/1

10/15

38.57 49.09 49.09 49.09 49.09 49.09 56.81 56.81 56.81

64 84 84 102 102 112 140 168 168

64 84 84 102 102 112

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

25" 25" 25" 27.5" 27.5" 27.5" 27.5" 27.5" 27.5"

(5.59) (5.59) (5.59) (7.46) (7.46) (7.46) (11.19) (11.19) (11.19)

(22.37) (29.84) (29.84) (37.29) (37.29) (37.29) (44.74) (44.74) (44.74)

11960 14250 15080 16900 18700 20800 17500 17500 17500

19550 22100 24650 27625 29800 29800 35000 35000 35000

18"

7700/13600 N/A

3 3

15 15

N/A

8900/ 13600

6

18"

100/62/39/0100/59/39/0100/65/31/0100/65/30/

3/1 3/1

15/10 15/10

N/A

6

20"

10700/

16150

4 5

15 15

N/A N/A N/A

N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A

8 8 8

0

2/4

10/15

100/71/43/

26/0

6

15

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

15

GGeenneerraall DDaattaa

Table 2. SCWF/SIWF Water-cooled self-contained, 46-110 tons (continued)

Unit Size 46 52 58 65 72 80 90 100 110

Refrigerant Charge — lbs. R410A (Standard

Capacity/High

Capacity)

Circuit A

Circuit B

Circuit C

Circuit D

Circuit E

Circuit F

Capacity Steps - %

Notes:

1. Compressors are Trane 3-D™ scroll.

2. All units operate with R-410A. Units ships with full operating charge.

3. Maximum cfm limits are set to prevent moisture carryover on the evaporator coil.

4. Minimum cfm limits are set to ensure stable thermal expansion valve operation at low load conditions.

24.5/28.5

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

100/70/41/30/

0

21.0

100/65/

32/0

26.5/

31.5

26.5/

31.5

26.5/

31.5

100/65/

30/0

22.0 24.5 28.0 24.5 24.5 24.5

21.0 22.0 28.0 24.5 24.5 24.5

24.5 24.5 24.5

24.5 24.5

100/71/ 44/24/0

100/71/ 43/23/0

100/73/ 46/20/0

100/80/ 40/20/0

100/75/ 38/19/0

100/66/ 33/17/0

Table 3. SCRF/SIRF Air-cooled self-contained

Unit Size 25 29 30 35 40 50 60

Compressor Data

Quantity

Nominal Ton/Comp

Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Evaporator Coil Data

Rows 4 4 3 4 4 4 6

Sq. Ft.

FPF 144 144 120 144 144 144 144

Evaporator Fan Data

Quantity

Size (Dia.)

Minimum HP 5 5 5 5 7.5 7.5 10

Minimum kW

Maximum HP 20 20 25 25 30 40 50

Maximum kW

Minimum Design CFM

Maximum Design CFM

Refrigerant Charge

Capacity Steps - %

1/1 1/1

15/10 15/10

29.98 29.98 31.35 31.35 38.57 49.09 49.09

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

18" 18" 20" 20" 25" 25" 27.5"

(3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (3.73) (5.59) (5.59) (7.46)

(18.64) (18.64) (18.64) (18.64) (22.37) (29.84) (37.29)

8700 8700 9100 9880 11960 15080 20800

12325 13600 14875 16150 19550 24650 29800

100/62/39/0 100/59/39/0 100/65/31/0 100/65/30/0

3 3

10 10

See Note 2 below

2/1

10/15

100/70/41/

30/0

15 15

100/65/30/0

3 4

100/73/46/

20/0

16

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

GGeenneerraall DDaattaa

Table 3. SCRF/SIRF Air-cooled self-contained (continued)

Unit Size 25 29 30 35 40 50 60

CCRC/CIRC Unit Match

Notes:

1. Compressors are Trane 3-D™ scroll.

2. All units operate with R-410A. Units ship with a dry nitrogen holding charge. Field refrigerant system charge required. Refer to Table 4, p. 17 for

amounts required.

3. Maximum cfm limits are set to prevent moisture carryover on the evaporator coil.

4. Minimum cfm limits are set to ensure stable thermal expansion valve operation at low load conditions.

Table 4. SCRF/SIRF Air–cooled self–contained and CCRC/CIRC remote air-cooled condenser refrigerant data

29 29 35 35 40 50 60

SCRF/SIRF & CCRC/CIRCUnit

Size

No. of Refrigerant Circuits

Operating Charge - lbs. R-410A

Operating Charge - kg R-410A

Cond. Storage Cap. - lbs. R-410A

Cond. Storage Cap. - kg R-410A

Notes:

1. Refrigerant charges are listed as circuit 1 circuit 2 and provide only an estimate. Final charge requires sound field charging practice.

2. Operating charge is for entire system, which includes the air–cooled self–contained, remote air–cooled condenser, and 25 feet of interconnecting

refrigerant piping.

3. At conditions of 95° F (35° C), condenser storage capacity is 95% full.

4. To determine the correct amount of refrigerant needed for a particular application, reference the Trane Reciprocating Refrigeration Manual.

25/29 29/29 30/35 35/35 40/40 50/50 60/60

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

56.2/38.0 56.2/38.0 71/35.5 75/37.5 86.5/39.5 100/52

23.1/17 23.1/17 32.2/16.1 34/17 39.2/17.9 44.5/22.7 46/46

51/37 51/37 74/37 74/37 74/51 102/51 102/102

23.1/16.8 23.1/16.8 33.6/16.8 33.6/16.8 33.6/23.1 46.3/23.1 46.3/46.3

Table 5. SCWF/SIWF water volumes

Water Volume in U.S. Gallons / Liters

Unit Size

20 9.0 34.1 17.4 65.9 16.9 64.0

22 9.0 34.1 17.4 65.9 16.9 64.0

25 9.0 34.1 17.4 65.9 16.9 64.0

29 9.0 34.1 20.5 77.6 18.8 71.2

32 9.0 34.1 20.5 77.6 18.8 71.2

35 10.0 37.9 21.9 82.9 20.2 76.5

38 10.0 37.9 21.9 82.9 20.2 76.5

42 15.0 56.8 32.2 121.9 31.4 118.9

46 15.0 56.8 32.2 121.9 31.4 118.9

52 15.0 56.8 36.9 139.7 35.9 135.9

58 15.0 56.8 36.9 139.7 35.9 135.9

65 16.0 60.6 37.9 143.5 36.9 139.7

72 16.0 60.6 37.9 143.5 36.9 139.7

80 16.0 60.6 37.9 143.5 36.9 139.7

90 22.5 85.2 50.1 189.6

100 23.0 87.1 50.6 191.5

110 24.0 90.8 51.6 195.3

W/o Economizer

Gallons Liters Gallons Liters Gallons Liters

With Mech. Cleanable Econ With Chem. Cleanable Econ

N/A N/A

101.5/

101.5

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

17

GGeenneerraall DDaattaa

Table 6. SCWF/SIWF Refrigerant circuits, number of compressors by circuit

Circuit

Unit Size 1 2 3 4 5 6

20/22/25 Ton

29/32 Ton

35/38 Ton

42/46 Ton

52/58 Ton

60/72 Ton

80 Ton 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T

90 Ton 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T

100 Ton 1-15T 1-15T 1-15T 1-15T 1-10T 1-10T

110 Ton 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T

Note: This table depicts compressor location in unit, plan view from left corner.

1- 10T 1- 10T

1- 15T 1- 10T

1- 10T 1- 10T 1- 10T

1- 15T 1- 10T 1- 10T

1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T

1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 15T 1- 10T

Table 7. SCRF/SIRF Refrigerant circuits, number of compressors by circuit

Unit Size 1 2

25/29 Ton

30/35 Ton

40 Ton

50 Ton 2-15T 1-15T

60 Ton 2-15T 2-15T

Note: This table depicts compressor location in unit, plan view from left corner.

N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A

N/A N/A

Circuit

1-15T 1-10T

2-10T 1-10T

1-10T, 1-15T

1-10T

Table 8. Filter data, water-cooled units models SCWF & SIWF

Unit Size 20- 38 tons 40-85 tons 90-110 tons

Number - Size (In.)

8 - 20 x 18 12 - 25 x 20 15 - 24 x 24

4 - 20 x 20 6 - 20 x 20 3 - 24 x 12

Units With Hot Water Or Steam

4 - 16 x 20 4 - 25 x 20

4 - 20 x 20 2 - 20 x 20

4 - 18 x 20 8 - 25 x 16

Table 9. Filter data, air-cooled units models SCRF & SIRF

Unit size 20- 35 tons 40-60 tons

Number - Size (in.)

Units With Hot Water Or Steam

18

8 - 20 x 18 12 - 25 x 20

4 - 20 x 20 6 - 20 x 20

n/a

4 - 20 x 16

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Table 9. Filter data, air-cooled units models SCRF & SIRF (continued)

Unit size 20- 35 tons 40-60 tons

4 - 16 x 20 4 - 25 x 20

Number - Size (in.)

4 - 20 x 20 2 - 20 x 20

4 - 18 x 20 8 - 25 x 16

N/A

4 - 20 x 16

Table 10. Self-contained heating coil

Unit Size SCWF 20 - 38 SCWF 42 - 80 SCRF 20 - 35 SCRF 40 - 60

Steam Coil

Coil Type

Rows 1 1 1 1

No./Size (inches) (2) 24 x 58 (2) 30 x 81 (2) 24 x 58) (2) 30 x 81

No./Size (mm) (2) 609.6 x 1473.2 (2) 762 x 2057.4 (2) 609.6 x 1473.2 (2) 762 x 2057.4

FPF 42 42 42 42

Hot Water Coil

Coil Type

Rows 1 or 2

No./Size (inches) (2) 24 x 58 (2) 30 x 81 (2) 24 x 58 (2) 30 x8 1

No./Size (mm) (2) 609.6 x 1473.2 (2) 762 x 2057.4 (2) 609.6 x 1473.2 (2) 762 x 2057.4

FPF 80 or 108 80 or 108 80 or 108 80 or 108

Notes:

1. Hot water and steam heating coils have Prima-Flo® fins without turbulators.

2. For coil capacities, use TOPSS™ (Trane Official Product Selection Program).

3. Full capacity coils consist of two coils stacked and piped in parallel.

NS NS NS NS

5W 5W 5W 5W

N/A N/A N/A

GGeenneerraall DDaattaa

Table 11. Waterside economizer coil physical data

Model Unit Size

SCXF

SCXF 29 & 32

SCXF 29 & 32 Mechanical Cleanable 2 108 55 78.5

SCXF 29 & 32 Mechanical Cleanable 4 108 55 78.5

SCXF 29 & 32

SCXF 35 & 38

SCXF 35 & 38 Mechanical Cleanable 2 108 57.5 78.5

SCXF 35 & 38

SCXF 35 & 38 Mechanical Cleanable 4 108 57.5 78.5

SCXF 42 & 46

20, 22 & 25 Chemically Cleanable

20, 22 & 25

20, 22 & 25 Chemically Cleanable

20, 22 & 25

Type

Mechanical Cleanable 2 108 40 78.5

Mechanical Cleanable 4 108 40 78.5

Chemically Cleanable

Rows FPF

2 108 40 78.5

4 108 40 78.5

2 108 55 78.5

4 108 55 78.5

2 108 57.5 78.5

4 108 57.5 78.5

2 144 55 101

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Height

(in)

Length

(in)

19

GGeenneerraall DDaattaa

Table 11. Waterside economizer coil physical data (continued)

Model Unit Size

SCXF 42 & 46 Mechanical Cleanable 2 144 70 101

SCXF 42 & 46

SCXF 42 & 46 Mechanical Cleanable 4 144 70 101

SCXF

52, 58, 65, 72, 80, 85 Chemically Cleanable

52, 58, 65, 72, 80, 85

52, 58, 65, 72, 80, 85 Chemically Cleanable

52, 58, 65, 72, 80, 85

90, 100 & 110

Type

Chemically Cleanable

Mechanical Cleanable 2 144 70 101

Mechanical Cleanable 4 144 70 101

Mechanical Cleanable 4 144 70 119.3

Rows FPF

4 144 55 101

2 144 70 101

4 144 70 101

(in)

Height

Length

(in)

20

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Pre-Installation

Receiving

Receiving Checklist

Complete the following checklist immediately after receiving unit shipment to detect possible shipping damage:

• Inspect individual cartons before accepting. Check for rattles, bent carton corners, or other visible indications of shipping damage.

• If a unit appears damaged, inspect it immediately before accepting the shipment. Make specific notations concerning the damage on the freight bill. Do not refuse delivery.

• Inspect the unit for concealed damage before it is stored and as soon as possible after delivery. Report concealed damage to the freight line within the allotted time after delivery. Check with the carrier for their allotted time to submit a claim.

• Do not move damaged material from the receiving location. It is the receiver’s responsibility to provide reasonable evidence that concealed damage did not occur after delivery.

• Do not continue unpacking the shipment if it appears damaged. Retain all internal packing, cartons, and crate. Take photos of damaged material if possible.

• Notify the carrier of the damage immediately by phone and mail. Request an immediate joint inspection of the damage by the carrier and consignee.

NNoottee:: Notify your Trane representative of the damage

and arrange for repair. Have the carrier inspect the damage before making any repairs to the unit.

Ship-Separate Accessories

Field-installed sensors ship separately inside main control panel of the unit. Extra filters, sheaves, and belts ship in the fan motor section of the unit. Condenser plugs, spring isolators, and Iso-pads ship stored in the bottom left side of the unit.

Contractor Installation Responsibilities

Complete the following checklist before beginning final unit installation:

• Verify the unit size and tagging with the unit nameplate.

• Make certain the floor or foundation is level, solid, and sufficient to support the unit and accessory weights. Level or repair the floor before positioning the unit if necessary.

• Allow minimum recommended clearances for routine maintenance and service. Allow space at

end of the unit for shaft removal and servicing. Refer to the unit submittals for dimensions. See also the “Service Clearances” section in the Dimensional Data chapter.

• Allow three fan diameters above the unit for the discharge ductwork. Return air enters the rear of the unit and conditioned supply air discharges through the top.

• Electrical connection knockouts are on the top, left side of the unit.

• Allow adequate space for piping access and panel removal. Condenser water piping, refrigerant piping, and condensate drain connections are on the lower left end panel.

NNoottee:: Unit height and connection locations will

change if using vibration isolators. The unit height may increase up to 5-7/8” with spring type isolators.

• Electrical supply power must meet specific balance and voltage requirements as described in chapter “Electrical Installation”.

• Water-cooled units only: The installer is responsible for providing a condenser main, standby water pump, cooling tower, pressure gauges, strainers, and all components for waterside piping. See

“Water Piping,” p. 38 for general waterside

recommendations.

• Air-cooled units only: The installer is responsible for providing and installing the remote air-cooled condenser and refrigerant piping.

Unit Inspection

To protect against loss due to damage incurred in transit, perform inspection immediately upon receipt of the unit.

Exterior Inspection

If the job site inspection reveals damage or material shortages, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Specify the type and extent of the damage on the bill of lading before signing. Notify the appropriate sales representative.

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: Do not proceed with installation of a

damaged unit without sales representative’s approval.

• Visually inspect the complete exterior for signs of shipping damages to unit or packing material.

• Verify that the nameplate data matches the sales order and bill of lading.

• Verify that the unit is properly equipped and there are no material shortages.

• Verify that the power supply complies with the unit nameplate specifications.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

21

Shipping Cover

PPrree--IInnssttaallllaattiioonn

Inspection for Concealed Damage

Visually inspect the components for concealed damage as soon as possible after delivery and before it is stored.

If concealed damage is discovered:

• Notify the carrier’s terminal of the damage immediately by phone and by mail.

• Concealed damage must be reported within 15 days.

• Request an immediate, joint inspection of the damage with the carrier and consignee.

• Stop unpacking the unit.

• Do not remove damaged material from receiving location.

• Take photos of the damage, if possible.

Figure 3. Typical unit shipping package

• The owner must provide reasonable evidence that the damage did not occur after delivery.

Repair

Notify the appropriate sales representative before arranging unit installation or repair.

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: Do not repair unit until the damage has

been inspected by the carrier’s representative.

Unpacking

Commercial self-contained units ship assembled with protective coverings over the coil and discharge openings.Figure 3, p. 22 illustrates a typical shipping package.

22

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

PPrree--IInnssttaallllaattiioonn

Unit Protective Covers

Remove shipping protection coverings from human interface panel (HI) at control panel, filter box (or air inlet opening), discharge air opening, and optional variable frequency drive (VFD).

Supply Fan Isolators

Remove the shipping channels and four fan mounting bolts from beneath the fan. Open both fan compartment doors to access the channels.

Figure 4. Fan Assembly Shipping Spacer Locations

NNootteess::

• There are six fan mounting points for 40-110 ton units.

• The 20 to 38 ton units use neoprene isolators, and 40 to 110 ton units use spring isolators.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

23

Dimensional Data

Figure 5. 20 to 38 ton self-contained

NNootteess::

24

1. All unit weights include refrigerant, water, controllers, electric heat and valves.

2. Add 150 lbs. to total weight to obtain approximate shipping weight.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Figure 6. 42 to 80 ton self-contained

DDiimmeennssiioonnaall DDaattaa

NNootteess::

1. All unit weights include refrigerant, water, controllers, electric heat and valves.

2. Add 150 lbs. to total weight to obtain approximate shipping weight.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

25

Ext. Height

Std. Height

Low Height

43.50"

27.75"

19.625"

Human

Interface

89.50"

Unit Control

Box

140.00"

VFD/

Interface

Plenum (low, standard,

and extended height shown)

72.00"

3.50"

133.00"

69.75"

3.50"

Filter Rack

*

Isolator Mounting Location (x6)

on bottom of unit

80.50”

86.25”

DDiimmeennssiioonnaall DDaattaa

Figure 7. 90 to 110 ton self-contained: front view

Figure 8. 90 to 110 ton self-contained: top view (isolator mounting locations shown)

26

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Figure 9. Detail A: electrical connections 20 to 110 tons

40 3/8” (20-38 Ton)

PLUGS

DDiimmeennssiioonnaall DDaattaa

Table 12. Discharge dimensions (in.)

Unit Model Fan Size A B C D

Standard Fan

SCWF 20-25 18” 31.85 23.5 23.11 20.4

SCWF 29-32

SCRF 25-29

SCWF 35-38

SCRF 30-35

SCWF 42-58

SCRF 40-50

SCWF 65-80

SCRF 60

SCWF 90-110 27.5” 50.7 33.5 28.8 34.5

SCWF 38 18” 44.8 23.25 36.78 19

SCWF 46 18” 44.8 23.25 36.78 19

SCWF 58 18” 44.8 23.25 36.78 20.4

SCWF 72 20” 43.4 26.2 34.77 24.6

18” 31.85 23.5 23.11 20.4

20” 30.5 26.2 21.25 25.75

25” 43.75 33 31.5 31.5

27.5” 43.5 33.5 28.63 34.5

Low Flow Fan Option

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

27

Main Control Panel

Vacuum Trap Connection

Condensate Return

Vacuum Trap Connection Steam Inlet Connection

Condensate Return

Air Inlet

L

K

F

N

M

H

J

A

C

B

Notes:

1. All coils are factory mounted, piped, and wired.

2. All piping connections are 1-1/2” (38.1mm) female NPT fittings.

Main Control Panel

Air Inlet

Hot Water Outlet Connection

Hot Water Inlet Connection

H

F

G

A

B

E

D

C

DDiimmeennssiioonnaall DDaattaa

Steam and Hot Water Coils

Steam Coils

Figure 10. Steam Coil

Table 13. Piping locations for steam coils (in)(lbs)

Unit Size A B C D E F G H J K L M N

20-38 Ton

42-80 Ton

Note: Weight includes complete heating coil box.

60-3/8 82-7/8

72-7/8 105-1/4

18 — —

22-3/8

13-1/4

— —

18-1/2 3-7/8

22-1/8 6-3/8

5

5-375

4-3/8 1-1/4

Weight

460

600

Hot Water Coils

Figure 11. Hot Water Coil

Table 14. Hot water coil piping locations & weight (in)(lbs)

Unit Size A B C D E F G H

20-38 Ton

42-80 Ton

Note: Weight includes complete heating coil box.

28

60 3/8 82 7/8

72 7/8 105 1/4

18

20 5/8 8 1/8 22 3/8 3 5/8 8 1/4

24 1/2 10 3/4 13 1/4 3 5/8 8 1/4

Weight

460

600

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

B

C

A

DDiimmeennssiioonnaall DDaattaa

Plenum

Figure 12. Six-inch filter rack

Table 15. Plenum dimensions (in)(lbs)

Unit Model A B C

64-7/8 24-5/8 95-7/8

64-7/8 32-3/8 95-7/8

64-7/8

80-3/8 21-1/8 119-7/8

80-3/8 28-5/8 119-7/8

80-3/8

80-1/2 19-5/8

80-1/2 27-3/4

80-1/2 43-1/2

45

20-38 Ton

42-80 Ton

90-110 Ton

low

std.

ext.

low

std.

ext.

low

std.

ext.

Filters

95-7/8

119-7/8

140 430

140 595

140 795

Weight

325

430

705

390

540

705

Table 16. Six-inch filter rack weight, lbs.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Unit Size

20-38 212

42-80 257

Weight

29

DDiimmeennssiioonnaall DDaattaa

Airside Economizer

Figure 13. Airside economizer

Table 17. Airside economizer sizes and dimensions (in.)

Size A B C D E

SXWF 20 44 74

SXRF 25 44 74

SXWF 22 44 74

SXRF 29 44 74

SXWF 32 44 74

SXRF 30-35 44 74

SXWF 35-38 44 74

SXWF 42

SXRF 40

SXWF 46

SXRF 50

SXRF 60

SXRF 52-58

SXWF 65-80

Size

SXWF 20

SXRF 25

SXWF 22

SXRF 29

SXWF 32

SXRF 30-35

SXWF 35-38

57-3/8 86-1/2 13-1/4 104-3/8 8-7/8 83-5/8 63-1/2

57-3/8 86-1/2 13-1/4 104-3/8 8-7/8 94-1/8 63-1/2 28-1/8

57-3/8 86-1/2 13-1/4 104-3/8 8-7/8 96-5/8 63-1/2

H (1) H (2)

9-3/4 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4

7-1/4 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4

9-3/4 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4 9-1/2 62-3/4

4-7/8 11-1/8 20-1/2 22-1/4 9-1/2 62-3/4

22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 66-3/4 49-3/4 23-1/4 20-1/2

22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 68-5/8 49-3/4 28-1/8 20-1/2

22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 74-1/4 62-3/4 23-1/4 20-1/2

22-3/8 81-3/4 8-3/4 73-1/2 62-3/4

J K L M

16

F (1) F (2) G (1) G (2)

33

33 26

52

20-1/2

26

37-1/2

Weight

49-3/4

430

500

30

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Table 17. Airside economizer sizes and dimensions (in.) (continued)

Air Inlet

See Table

42” (1066.8mm) (20-38 Ton)

Minimum

48” (1219mm) (42-110 Ton)

Control

Panel

36” (914.4mm)

Minimum

Left side

Front

Right side

Size

SXWF 42

SXRF 40

SXWF 46

SXRF 50

SXRF 60

SXRF 52-58

SXWF 65-80

H (1) H (2)

2-1/2

6-7/8

1-7/8 9-1/4 37-1/2

15 26

J K L M

24-3/4 20-3/8 63-1/2

19

20-3/8 63-1/2

DDiimmeennssiioonnaall DDaattaa

Weight

640

700

800

Service Clearances

See figure and table below for recommended service and code clearances.

Table 18. Service and code clearance requirements

Side

Front

Left

Right

Inlet

Distance—inches (mm) Purpose

42 (1066) (20 to 38 tons) NEC code requirements

48 (1219) (42 to 110 tons)

36 (914) Filter, refrigeration, and waterside components

9 (229) Non VFD w/open return

18 (457)

9 (229) 20 to 80 tons, w/VFD 7.5 to 50 hp

36 (914) 90 to 110 tons (motor, condensers, and refrigeration)

18 (457) (20 to 80 tons)

36 (914) (90 to 110 tons)

Figure 14. Top view of self-contained unit showing recommended service and code clearances(a)

NNoottee:: (a) See for right side clearance values for various

unit configurations.

Fan service/removal

Non VFD w/ducted return

Provides uniform airflow

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

31

Weights

Table 19. Unit weights — SCWF/SCRF/SIWF/SIRF

Airside

Economizer

lbs. (kg)

N/A N/A

20

22

25

29

32

35

38

42

46

52

58

65

72

80

90

100

110

25

29

30

35

40

50

60

Base Weight

lbs. (kg)

3102 (1407) 430 (195) 140 (64) 340 (154) 460 (209)

3170 (1438) 430 (195) 140 (64) 340 (154) 460 (209) 144 (65) 212 (96)

3326 (1508) 500 (227) 190 (86) 390 (177) 460 (209)

3514 (1594) 500 (227) 190 (86) 390 (177) 460 (209) 132 (60) 212 (96)

3721 (1688) 500 (227) 280 (127) 505 (229) 460 (209)

3819 (1732) 500 (227) 280 (127) 505 (229) 460 (209) 138 (63) 212 (96)

4615 (2093) 640 (290) 255 (116) 505 (229) 600 (272)

4705 (2134) 640 (290) 255 (116) 505 (229) 600 (272) 170 (77) 257 (117)

4892 (2219) 700 (318) 335 (152) 665 (302) 600 (272)

5142 (2332) 700 (318) 335 (152) 665 (302) 600 (272) 216 (98) 257 (117)

5371 (2436) 800 (363) 335 (152) 665 (302) 600 (272)

5491 (2490) 800 (363) 335 (152) 665 (302) 600 (272) 216 (98) 257 (117)

5814 (2637) 800 (363) 335 (152) 665 (302) 600 (272)

6330 (2871)

6840 (3103)

6852 (3108)

3231 (1465) 500 (227)

3321 (1506) 500 (227)

3421 (1552) 500 (227)

4294 (1948) 640 (290)

4731 (2146) 700 (318)

5288 (2399) 800 (363)

Unit

SCWF/

SIWF

SCRF/

SIRF

Notes:

1. All unit weights include refrigerant, water, and controllers, electric heat and valves.

2. Add 150 lbs. to total weight to obtain approximate shipping weight.

3. Flexible horizontal discharge plenum option weights: 45-inch plenum = 705 lbs., Standard height plenum = 430 lbs., Low height plenum = 325 lbs.

Unit Size

2-Row

Waterside

Economizer

lbs. (kg)

N/A N/A

4-Row

Waterside

Economizer

lbs. (kg)

1015 (460)

Heating Coil Box

lbs. (kg)

N/A

460 (209)

600 (272)

6-Row

Evap. Coil

lbs. (kg)

N/A

255 (116)

N/A N/A

6-inch filter

rack lbs.

(kg)

212 (96)

257 (117)

N/A

Table 20. Unit weights — CCRC/CIRC

Unit Size

CCRC/CIRC 20

CCRC/CIRC 29

CCRC/CIRC 32

32

Shipping Weight lbs (kg). Operating Weight lbs.(kg)

2030 (920) 1906 (865)

2084 (945) 1960 (890)

2138 (970) 2014 (915)

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Table 20. Unit weights — CCRC/CIRC (continued)

WWeeiigghhttss

Unit Size

CCRC/CIRC 35

CCRC/CIRC 40

CCRC/CIRC 50

CCRC/CIRC 60

Shipping Weight lbs (kg). Operating Weight lbs.(kg)

3018 (1370) 2833 (1285)

3072 (1395) 2887 (1310)

3995 (1810) 3695 (1675)

4275 (1940) 3975 (1805)

Table 21. VFD weights

Without Bypass With Bypass

HP

7.5 126 57.153 114 51.710 114 51.710 7.5 215 97.522 170 77.111 170 77.111

LBS

10 126 57.153 114 51.710 126 57.153 10 215 97.522 215 97.522 215 97.522

15 152 68.946 126 57.153 126 57.153 15 220 99.790 215 97.522 215 97.522

20 152 68.946 126 57.153 126 57.153 20 220 99.790 215 97.522 215 97.522

25 152 68.946 126 57.153 126 57.153 25 250 113.398 215 97.522 215 97.522

30 177 80.286 152 68.946 152 68.946 30 250 113.398 220 99.790 220 99.790

40 177 80.286 152 68.946 152 68.946 40 290 131.542 220 99.790 220 99.790

50 NA NA 152 68.946 152 68.946 50 NA NA 250 113.398 250 113.398

60 NA NA 177 80.286 NA NA 60 NA NA 250 113.398 NA NA

Note: Weights include swing-out door.

Kg

LBS

Kg

LBS

Kg

HP

200V 460V 575V

LBS

Kg

LBS

Kg

LBS

Kg

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

33

Installation - Mechanical

Unit Handling

WWAARRNNIINNGG

IImmpprrooppeerr UUnniitt LLiifftt!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo pprrooppeerrllyy lliifftt uunniitt iinn aa LLEEVVEELL ppoossiittiioonn ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn uunniitt ddrrooppppiinngg aanndd ppoossssiibbllyy ccrruusshhiinngg ooppeerraattoorr//tteecchhnniicciiaann wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,, aanndd eeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr pprrooppeerrttyy--oonnllyy ddaammaaggee.. TTeesstt lliifftt uunniitt aapppprrooxxiimmaatteellyy 2244 iinncchheess ((6611 ccmm)) ttoo vveerriiffyy pprrooppeerr cceenntteerr ooff ggrraavviittyy lliifftt ppooiinntt.. TToo aavvooiidd ddrrooppppiinngg ooff uunniitt,, rreeppoossiittiioonn lliiffttiinngg ppooiinntt iiff uunniitt iiss nnoott lleevveell..

• Use spreader bars to avoid unit damage.

• Spreader bar must be a minimum of 11 feet for 2085 ton units and 12 feet for 90-110 tons. Chains must not bear on top of unit.

• Do not use hooks to lift unit. Do not hook into open channels to lift unit. Loop chain through lifting lug. See detail in Figure 15, p. 34 and Figure 17, p. 35.

• Lift using overhead crane only. Adjust rigging for unit center of gravity.

• Unit center of gravity will fall within center of gravity block at various locations depending on unit options.

• See unit nameplate for unit weights.

• Do not stack units.

Figure 15. Detail of how to loop chain through lifting lug on self-contained

Table 22. Gravity Block Dimensions 20 to 80 tons, in.

Unit Size A B C

20-35 25 32 38

42-80 33 34 50

Figure 16. Gravity Block Dimensions 20 to 80 tons, in.

34

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Figure 17. Gravity block location and dimensions for 90 to 110 ton units

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- MMeecchhaanniiccaall

Installation Preparation

Before installing the unit, perform the following procedures to ensure proper unit operation.

1. Position the unit and skid assembly in its final location.

2. Test lift the unit to determine exact unit balance and stability before hoisting it to the installation location. See “Unit Handling,” p. 34 for proper rigging procedures and cautions.

3. Remove the skids from under the unit. See Figure

3, p. 22. Refer to the “Skid Removal” section. If you

find internal damage, file a claim immediately to the delivering carrier.

4. Remove the protective shipping covers from the unit.

5. Verify isolators are properly tightened for operation. See “Unit Vibration Isolator Option,” p.

35.

6. Tighten compressor isolator mounting bolts. Torque to 18 ft/lbs. (plus/minus 2 ft/Lbs.)

Unit Vibration Isolator Option

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: Vibration isolation is not necessary for the

unit since the factory internally isolates the fan and compressors, thus creating double isolation. Trane strongly recommends that you consult a vibration specialist when considering double isolation. In general, Trane does not recommend doubleisolation.

If job requirements dictate unit isolators, use a housedspring isolator with a locating pin. Factory-provided unit isolators are type CP and indicate the spring number on the outer housing. See . Set the spring-type vibration isolators in position before completing electrical, piping, or duct connections. The 20-38 ton units require four isolators per unit, and the 40-80 ton units require six isolators per unit. Reference the isolator placement sheet that ships with the isolators to indicate proper placement.

Unit Isolator Installation Procedure

Use the following procedure to install isolators:

1. Position the isolators under the unit base referring to the isolator placement sheet that ships with the unit isolators. Lift one end of the unit at a time to position the isolators. Fasten the isolators to the floor using anchor bolts.

2. Level the unit by adjusting the isolator heights. Unit weight may cause the upper housing of the spring isolators to rest on the lower housing. Maintain clearances between 1/4 and 1/2". To increase the clearance, lift the unit off the isolator and turn the leveling bolt counterclockwise. Verify that the unit is level and the housing clearances are correct. The maximum allowable difference between isolator heights is 1/4". Shim as required under the isolators.

NNoottee:: The unit is equipped with a positively sloped

drain pan to help indoor air quality (IAQ) and does not require one corner of the unit to be pitched.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

35

3 Fan Diameters

Duct

Discharge

3-inch

Duct

Flexible

Air

Return

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- MMeecchhaanniiccaall

Figure 18. Optional spring isolator dimensional data

Duct Connections

Return air enters the rear of the unit and conditioned supply air discharges through the top. Attach supply air ductwork directly to the unit’s top panel, around the fan discharge opening. A duct collar is not provided.

NNoottee:: Units equipped with flexible horizontal discharge

plenum option may include a duct collar when holes are factory cut. If discharge openings are field-cut, refer to the following “Installation — Plenum” section.

Install all air ducts according to the National Fire Protection Association standards for the “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems other than Residence Type (NFPA 90A) and Residence Type Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems (NFPA 90B).

Make duct connections to the unit with a flexible material such as heavy canvas. If a fire hazard exists, Trane recommends using Flexweave 1000, type FW30 or equivalent canvas. Use three inches for return duct and three inches for discharge duct. Keep material loose to absorb fan vibration.

• If using return ductwork to the unit, secure it with three inches of flexible duct connector.

• Extend discharge duct upward without change in size or direction for at least three fan diameters.

• Use 3" flexible duct connection on discharge ductwork.

NNoottee:: Compressors and fan assembly are internally

isolated. External isolation devices (spring mounting isolators) are at discretion of a vibration specialist consulted by building or HVAC system designer.

Run the ductwork straight from the opening for a minimum of three fan diameters. See Figure 19, p. 36. Extend remaining ductwork as far as possible without changing size or direction. Do not make abrupt turns or

transitions near the unit due to increased noise and excessive static losses. Use elbows with splitters or turning vanes to minimize static losses.

Poorly constructed turning vanes may cause airflow generated noise. Align the fan outlet properly with the ductwork to decrease noise levels in the duct and to increase fan performance. To complete trunk ductwork to the VAV terminal units, refer to the VAV box manuals for specific requirements. Check total external static pressures against fan characteristics to be sure the required airflow is available throughout the ductwork.

To achieve maximum acoustical performance, minimize the duct static pressure setpoint.

Figure 19. Duct connection recommendations

Installing the Plenum

Before installing plenum, attach insulation strip that ships with plenum. See Figure 20, p. 37 for proper

36

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Plenum Bottom View

Dashed line indicates correct insulation placement.

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- MMeecchhaanniiccaall

insulation location. Align plenum front with control panel side of unit. Using strips and screws provided, secure plenum to unit. Treat field-cut holes to prevent fiberglass from entering the air stream.

NNoottee:: Plenum insulation must be applied properly to

prevent air bypass around the plenum. See

Figure 20, p. 37.

Figure 20. Correct plenum insulation placement

Installing the Airside Economizer

NNoottee:: Airside economizer option available on 20 to 80

tons only.

UUnniitt HHaannddlliinngg

1. Hoist the damper cabinet to the installation location with straps positioned under the skid as shown in

Figure 21, p. 38. Use spreader bars to prevent unit

damage during lifting.

2. With the damper cabinet at its final location (near the unit), remove the screws securing it to the skid from the side flanges. Retain these screws for later use.

UUnniitt PPrreeppaarraattiioonn

3. Open the access door and remove the damper cabinet’s support legs and its hanging bracket. The support legs are secured to the skid, and the hanging bracket is secured with wire ties to an inside flange near the cabinet’s base. Remove the C-channel collar and install it on the unit, if not already installed.

4. Remove the roll of 1/8" thick gasket from the damper cabinet’s W-supports, and apply it to the Cchannel collar mounted on the rear of the unit. This gasket will provide a seal between the damper cabinet and the unit.

5. Attach the legs (with screws provided) to the leg brackets located on the damper’s base.

6. Attach a field-provided clevis of suitable strength ( > 1/2"), to each of the corner lifting brackets through the 7/8" diameter holes.

7. Attach to the clevises a means of lifting the damper cabinet from its skid.

UUnniitt IInnssttaallllaattiioonn

8. Slowly raise the damper cabinet from its skid.

9. Attach the hanging bracket across the front of the damper cabinet. Position it with its short flange pointing to four o’clock, and secure it with screws provided. See Figure 21, p. 38.

10. Lift the damper cabinet and position it such that the hanging bracket is positioned over the unit’s Cchannel collar.

11. Lower the damper cabinet until the holes in its side flanges are aligned with the holes in the C-channel collar. Install screws removed in step 3 through the damper cabinet’s side flanges and into the Cchannel’s corresponding holes.

12. Attach ductwork to the top and back dampers according to local codes.

FFiieelldd WWiirriinngg CCoonnnneeccttiioonnss

WWAARRNNIINNGG

PPrrooppeerr FFiieelldd WWiirriinngg aanndd GGrroouunnddiinngg RReeqquuiirreedd!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww ccooddee ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. AAllll ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg MMUUSSTT bbee ppeerrffoorrmmeedd bbyy qquuaalliiffiieedd ppeerrssoonnnneell.. IImmpprrooppeerrllyy iinnssttaalllleedd aanndd ggrroouunnddeedd ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg ppoosseess FFIIRREE aanndd EELLEECCTTRROOCCUUTTIIOONN hhaazzaarrddss.. TToo aavvooiidd tthheessee hhaazzaarrddss,, yyoouu MMUUSSTT ffoollllooww rreeqquuiirreemmeennttss ffoorr ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg iinnssttaallllaattiioonn aanndd ggrroouunnddiinngg aass ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn NNEECC aanndd yyoouurr llooccaall// ssttaattee//nnaattiioonnaall eelleeccttrriiccaall ccooddeess..

13. Open the damper cabinet’s door and connect the ffaaccttoorryy--pprroovviiddeedd pplluugg from the actuator to the ffaaccttoorryy--pprroovviiddeedd pplluugg in the unit’s filter section.

14. CCaabbiinneettss wwiitthh TTRRAAQQ ddaammppeerrss oonnllyy:: Unroll two rolls of pneumatic tubing located inside damper cabinet. Route tubes through cabinet’s front upper panel (0.25 dia. holes provided). Connect to two pneumatic tubes protruding from customer electrical connection panel on unit. Be sure to connect black to black, white stripe to white stripe).

15. CCaabbiinneettss wwiitthh TTRRAAQQ ddaammppeerrss oonnllyy:: Locate the “bullet” sensor and rolled up wiring in the unit’s filter section. Route it into the damper cabinet and insert the sensor into the sensor mounting clip attached to underside of one of the Traq dampers.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

37

Spreader Bar

Strap

Lifting

Cable with spreader bar

C-Channel

Hanging Bracket

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- MMeecchhaanniiccaall

Figure 21. Proper lifting of the airside economizer (top) and airside economizer option (bottom)

NNoottee:: Four (4) condenser waterline drain plugs ship in

a bag in the left end of the unit. The installer must field install these four plugs using pipe thread sealer. An additional plug is provided for units with a waterside economizer.

1. Install the vent plugs in the economizer coil headers and condenser manifolds. See These plugs ship in a bag with the condenser drain plugs.

2. Attach the water supply line to the inlet connection, and the return line to the outlet connection. Entering and leaving water connections for all condensers are factory manifolded and require only single connections for entering and leaving water. If the unit has a waterside economizer and/or control valves, the factory pipes between these components.

3. If using a cooling tower, refer to for a typical piping circuit from the unit.

4. Ensure the water pressure to the unit does not exceed 400 psig.

NNoottee:: To prevent water pump damage, design system

piping to provide relief when using energy saving waterside economizer valves.

Figure 22. Economizer coil vent and condenser cleanout/drain plugs.

Water Piping

Condenser Connections

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHiigghh PPrreessssuurree WWaatteerr!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,, aanndd eeqquuiippmmeenntt ddaammaaggee.. PPrroovviiddee rreelliieeff vvaallvvee oonn ssyysstteemm wwaatteerr ppiippiinngg ttoo pprreevveenntt iinnssttaannttaanneeoouuss rreelleeaassee ooff hhiigghh pprreessssuurree wwaatteerr..

NNOOTTIICCEE

PPrrooppeerr WWaatteerr TTrreeaattmmeenntt RReeqquuiirreedd!!

TThhee uussee ooff uunnttrreeaatteedd oorr iimmpprrooppeerrllyy ttrreeaatteedd wwaatteerr ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ssccaalliinngg,, eerroossiioonn,, ccoorrrroossiioonn,, aallggaaee oorr sslliimmee.. UUssee tthhee sseerrvviicceess ooff aa qquuaalliiffiieedd wwaatteerr ttrreeaattmmeenntt ssppeecciiaalliisstt ttoo ddeetteerrmmiinnee wwhhaatt wwaatteerr ttrreeaattmmeenntt,, iiff aannyy,, iiss rreeqquuiirreedd.. TTrraannee aassssuummeess nnoo rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy ffoorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt ffaaiilluurreess wwhhiicchh rreessuulltt ffrroomm uunnttrreeaatteedd oorr iimmpprrooppeerrllyy ttrreeaatteedd wwaatteerr,, oorr ssaalliinnee oorr bbrraacckkiisshh wwaatteerr..

Condenser water piping knockouts are in the lower left end panel. If necessary, remove insulation to gain access. All field-installed piping must conform to applicable local, state, and federal codes. To complete condenser water connections follow the procedure below.

Condensate Drain Connections

The condensate drain is internally trapped. Condensate drain connections are on the right side of the unit. Connect condensate drain piping to the 1-1/4” NPT female fitting, using at least 7/8" OD copper or 3/4" OD iron pipe. Pitch the condensate line downward a

38

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- MMeecchhaanniiccaall

minimum of 1/2" for each 10' of horizontal run, away from the unit. Be sure to install the condensate drain “P” trap drain plug. Before starting the unit, fill the trap with water to prevent negative pressure in the fan section from impeding condensate flow.To facilitate drain pipe cleaning, install plugged tees in place of 90° elbows.

General Waterside Recommendations for Cooling Towers

Cooling tower control affects the unit cycle rates. Condenser water temperature swings from 10-15°F may cause excessive compressor, water valve, and unit cycling. Be sure to set the tower controls to minimize compressor/unit cycling.

Waterside Piping Arrangements

Install a condenser water pump between the cooling tower (either open or closed) and the self-contained unit. Lay out the remainder of the system condenser piping in reverse returns. This helps balance the system by equalizing the length of supply and return pipes. Multi-story buildings may use a direct return system with balancing valves at each floor.

Install the supply riser and its return in close proximity. Furnish both with permanent thermometers to check the waterside balance during startup and routine maintenance checks.

Also, include strainers at each pump inlet and unit. Install drain valves at the riser’s base to allow drainage points for system flushing during startup and routine maintenance. For condenser draining and header removal, include a shutoff/balancing valve on the entering and leaving waterside pipes, drain tees, and unions of each unit.

NNoottee:: Unit does not have floor drains.

Figure 23. Condenser water piping components for cooling tower system

(basic piping).This will cause the compressors to shut down and the mechanical cooling function will lockout. However, the economizer (if enabled) will continue to function. The compressors will reset when the entering water temperature reaches 58°F (15°C).

Units with variable water flow (intermediate piping) have a modulating condensing pressure control valve that allows compressor operation down to entering water temperatures of 35°F (2°C).

For more information on constant and variable water flow, see the Sequence of Operation section of this manual.

NNoottee:: Units with a waterside economizer can be set

from the human interface panel for variable or constant water flow.

Water Piping Verification

• Make return and supply water connections to the unit and/or waterside economizer piping package with recommended valves and piping components.

• Install unions to allow waterside maintenance.

• Install cooling tower and standby pumps.

• Treat water to prevent algae, slime, and corrosion.

• Prevent refrigerant piping from rubbing against other objects.

Installating the Hydronic Coil

Steam and Hot Water Coil

WWAARRNNIINNGG

UUnniitt SSttrruuccttuurraall IInntteeggrriittyy!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. UUnniitt ppaanneellss pprroovviiddee ssttrruuccttuurraall iinntteeggrriittyy.. DDoo nnoott rreemmoovvee mmoorree tthhaann ttwwoo nnoonn--aaddjjaacceenntt ppaanneellss aatt oonnee ttiimmee aass tthhiiss ccoouulldd ccaauussee tthhee pplleennuumm ffrraammee ttoo ccoollllaappssee..

Water Temperature Requirements

Do not allow the entering water temperature to go below 54°F (12.2°C) on units with constant water flow

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

NNoottee:: Hydronic coil options are available only on 20-80

ton units and can be field or factory mounted.

1. Position the coil box behind the unit with open side facing the unit inlet.

2. An envelope containing the gasket and mounting screws to attach the coil to the unit ships in the bottom of the unit. Install the pressure sensitive gasket to the unit side of the vertical flange on the coil box in two places.

3. Before attaching the coil box, connect the coil duct static pressure tube. This must be done before the coil box is bolted to the unit. If the unit connection does not have a static pressure tube, then no connection is required.

4. Apply edge protector to the flange on unit. Remove knockout on the unit filter cover and install the

39

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- MMeecchhaanniiccaall

bushing in the plastic bag. Run the wires through the bushing and connect wires to the unit.

5. After connecting wires and the static pressure tube, raise the coil box up against the unit and install the mounting screws. Recommended lifting points are at each end of the coil box.

6. Avoid routing wires over devices and sharp edges. Use wire ties about every 12 inches to secure wires to other wire harnesses.

7. Move the entering air temperature sensor upstream of the coil to ensure proper operation.

Refrigerant System

Trane Water Cooled Commercial Self-Contained units ship factory charged with R-410A refrigerant.

Trane Air Cooled Commercial Self-Contained and Condenser units ship with a dry nitrogen holding charge.

Before installing refrigerant piping, verify holding charge is present. Momentarily depress the CSC suction or discharge line (and condenser liquid line) access port valves.

If charge is present, continue with piping installation.

If no nitrogen escapes the access valve, leak test the unit refrigerant system to determine the leak source, and repair. See Maintenance section, “Refrigerant Leak

Test Procedure,” p. 92. After finding leak, remove test

pressure and repair leak using proper brazing procedures. See Maintenance section, “Brazing

Procedures,” p. 93. Retest unit(s) to ensure all leaks are

repaired. Continue with piping installation.

Interconnecting Piping

Refrigerant piping must be properly sized and applied. These two factors have a significant effect on both system performance and reliability.

Using , select proper liquid and discharge line size. Unit connection sizes are also shown. Install interconnecting piping using proper installation and brazing procedures.

Work on only one circuit at a time to minimize system exposure to potentially harmful moisture in the air.

Before installing piping verify compressor oil levels are near top of sight glass or above.

NNoottee:: CSC units (and replacement compressors) ship

fully charged with POE oil from the factory. Scroll compressors use POE oil (OIL00079, quart container or OIL00080, gallon container), DO NOT substitute.

Capped discharge and liquid line connections are located near bottom, left side of the indoor unit. CCRC/ CIRC connections are located in the unit front, at top.

Remove caps with a tube cutter to minimize risk of getting chips inside piping.

NNoottee:: When facing the control panel side of the unit.

Circuit #2 is always on the left and Circuit #1 is always on the right.

Cleanliness is extremely important during system installation to minimize residual contaminants, such as oxidization and scale.

Attach vacuum pump and begin evacuation as soon as piping installation is complete. This starts system dehydration and helps prevent POE compressor oil contamination. This will also indicate large leaks if vacuum does not hold (below 400 microns and hold for 2 hours). Complete LeakTest and Evacuation (for procedures, see “Refrigerant Leak Test Procedure,” p.

92 and “System Evacuation Procedures,” p. 93 in

Maintenance section) before starting “Preliminary

Refrigerant Charging,” p. 41.

NNootteess::

• Installation of a field supplied discharge line access port near indoor units with optional discharge line ball valve will make high side pressure measurements easier during leak test.

• UseType “L” refrigerant grade copper tubing only.

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!

PPOOEE ooiill iiss hhyyggrroossccooppiicc –– iitt aabbssoorrbbss wwaatteerr ddiirreeccttllyy ffrroomm tthhee aaiirr.. TThhiiss wwaatteerr iiss nneeaarrllyy iimmppoossssiibbllee ttoo rreemmoovvee ffrroomm tthhee ccoommpprreessssoorr ooiill aanndd ccaann rreessuulltt iinn ccoommpprreessssoorr ffaaiilluurreess.. TToo pprreevveenntt PPOOEE ooiill ffrroomm aabbssoorrbbiinngg wwaatteerr,, tthhee ssyysstteemm sshhoouulldd nnoott rreemmaaiinn ooppeenn ffoorr lloonnggeerr tthhaann nneecceessssaarryy.. WWhheenn ooppeenn,, ddrryy nniittrrooggeenn sshhoouulldd ffllooww tthhrroouugghh tthhee ppiippiinngg.. OOnnllyy nneeww ooiill ccoonnttaaiinneerrss sshhoouulldd bbee uusseedd ffoorr sseerrvviiccee aanndd mmaaiinntteennaannccee.. AAllwwaayyss uussee tthhee ssmmaalllleesstt ccoonnttaaiinneerr ssiizzee rreeqquuiirreedd ffoorr tthhee jjoobb rreeqquuiirreemmeennttss.. AAllwwaayyss lleeaavvee tthhee ooiill ccoonnttaaiinneerr ttiigghhttllyy sseeaalleedd uunnttiill ttiimmee ooff uussee.. DDoo nnoott rreeuussee ooiill tthhaatt hhaass bbeeeenn ooppeenneedd..

40

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- MMeecchhaanniiccaall

Table 23. Refrigerant piping sizes

Air Cooled Signature Connection Size (in)

Circuit 1 Circuit 2

SXRF Size

25, 29

30, 35, 40, 50

60

CXRC Size Liquid Discharge Liquid Discharge

20, 29

35, 40, 50

60

SXRF/CXRC Size Liquid Discharge Liquid Discharge

25/29 5/8 1 1/8 5/8 7/8

29/29 5/8 1 1/8 5/8 7/8

30/35 7/8 1 1/8 5/8 7/8

35/35 7/8 1 1/8 5/8 7/8

40/40 7/8 1 3/8

50/50 7/8 1 3/8 5/8 1 1/8

60/60 7/8 1 3/8 7/8 1 3/8

(a)

Use 1 1/8" for vertical risers.

Liquid Discharge Liquid Discharge

5/8 7/8 5/8 7/8

7/8 1 3/8 5/8 7/8

Remote Condenser Connection Size (in)

Circuit 1 Circuit 2

5/8 7/8 5/8 7/8

7/8 1 3/8 5/8 7/8

Interconnecting Tube Size (in)

Circuit 1 Circuit 2

(a)

5/8 7/8

Preliminary Refrigerant Charging

WWAARRNNIINNGG

CCoonnffiinneedd SSppaaccee HHaazzaarrddss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDoo nnoott wwoorrkk iinn ccoonnffiinneedd ssppaacceess wwhheerree rreeffrriiggeerraanntt oorr ootthheerr hhaazzaarrddoouuss,, ttooxxiicc oorr ffllaammmmaabbllee ggaass mmaayy bbee lleeaakkiinngg.. RReeffrriiggeerraanntt oorr ootthheerr ggaasseess ccoouulldd ddiissppllaaccee aavvaaiillaabbllee ooxxyyggeenn ttoo bbrreeaatthhee,, ccaauussiinngg ppoossssiibbllee aasspphhyyxxiiaattiioonn oorr ootthheerr sseerriioouuss hheeaalltthh rriisskkss.. SSoommee ggaasseess mmaayy bbee ffllaammmmaabbllee aanndd oorr eexxpplloossiivvee.. IIff aa lleeaakk iinn ssuucchh ssppaacceess iiss ddeetteecctteedd,, eevvaaccuuaattee tthhee aarreeaa iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy aanndd ccoonnttaacctt tthhee pprrooppeerr rreessccuuee oorr rreessppoonnssee aauutthhoorriittyy..

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

WWAARRNNIINNGG

EExxpplloossiioonn HHaazzaarrdd!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo pprrooppeerrllyy rreegguullaattee pprreessssuurree ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn aa vviioolleenntt eexxpplloossiioonn,, wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh,, sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,, oorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr pprrooppeerrttyy--oonnllyy-ddaammaaggee.. WWhheenn uussiinngg ddrryy nniittrrooggeenn ccyylliinnddeerrss ffoorr pprreessssuurriizziinngg uunniittss ffoorr lleeaakk tteessttiinngg,, aallwwaayyss pprroovviiddee aa pprreessssuurree rreegguullaattoorr oonn tthhee ccyylliinnddeerr ttoo pprreevveenntt eexxcceessssiivveellyy hhiigghh uunniitt pprreessssuurreess.. NNeevveerr pprreessssuurriizzee uunniitt aabboovvee tthhee mmaaxxiimmuumm rreeccoommmmeennddeedd uunniitt tteesstt pprreessssuurree aass ssppeecciiffiieedd iinn aapppplliiccaabbllee uunniitt lliitteerraattuurree..

41

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- MMeecchhaanniiccaall

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss PPrreessssuurreess!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn aa vviioolleenntt eexxpplloossiioonn,, wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. IIff aa hheeaatt ssoouurrccee iiss rreeqquuiirreedd ttoo rraaiissee tthhee ttaannkk pprreessssuurree dduurriinngg rreemmoovvaall ooff rreeffrriiggeerraanntt ffrroomm ccyylliinnddeerrss,, uussee oonnllyy wwaarrmm wwaatteerr oorr hheeaatt bbllaannkkeettss ttoo rraaiissee tthhee ttaannkk tteemmppeerraattuurree.. DDoo nnoott eexxcceeeedd aa tteemmppeerraattuurree ooff 115500°°FF.. DDoo nnoott uunnddeerr aannyy cciirrccuummssttaanncceess aappppllyy ddiirreecctt ffllaammee ttoo aannyy ppoorrttiioonn ooff tthhee ccyylliinnddeerr..

CCAAUUTTIIOONN

RReeffrriiggeerraanntt aatt FFrreeeezziinngg TTeemmppeerraattuurree!!!!

DDiirreecctt ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh lliiqquuiidd rreeffrriiggeerraanntt ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn mmiinnoorr oorr mmooddeerraattee iinnjjuurryy.. AAvvooiidd ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh sskkiinn.. IIff wwoorrkkiinngg wwiitthh rreeffrriiggeerraanntt iiss nneecceessssaarryy,, yyoouu MMUUSSTT wweeaarr aallll PPeerrssoonnaall PPrrootteeccttiivvee EEqquuiippmmeenntt ((PPPPEE)) iinncclluuddiinngg eeyyee pprrootteeccttiioonn,, ssaaffeettyy gglloovveess,, lloonngg sslleeeevveess,, aanndd ppaannttss.. IInn ccaassee ooff ccoonnttaacctt,, ttrreeaatt tthhee iinnjjuurryy ssiimmiillaarr ttoo ffrroossttbbiittee.. SSlloowwllyy wwaarrmm tthhee aaffffeecctteedd aarreeaa wwiitthh lluukkeewwaarrmm wwaatteerr aanndd sseeeekk iimmmmeeddiiaattee mmeeddiiccaall aatttteennttiioonn..

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ccoommpprreessssoorr ffaaiilluurree.. IIff iitt bbeeccoommeess nneecceessssaarryy ttoo rreemmoovvee oorr rreecchhaarrggee tthhee ssyysstteemm wwiitthh rreeffrriiggeerraanntt,, iitt iiss iimmppoorrttaanntt tthhaatt tthhee ffoolllloowwiinngg aaccttiioonnss aarree ttaakkeenn::

•• TToo pprreevveenntt ccrroossss ccoonnttaammiinnaattiioonn ooff rreeffrriiggeerraannttss aanndd ooiillss,, uussee oonnllyy ddeeddiiccaatteedd RR--441100AA sseerrvviiccee eeqquuiippmmeenntt..

•• DDiissccoonnnneecctt uunniitt ppoowweerr bbeeffoorree eevvaaccuuaattiioonn aanndd ddoo nnoott aappppllyy vvoollttaaggee ttoo ccoommpprreessssoorr wwhhiillee uunnddeerr vvaaccuuuumm..

•• DDuuee ttoo pprreesseennccee ooff PPOOEE ooiill,, ddoo nnoott lleeaavvee tthhee ssyysstteemm ooppeenn ffoorr mmoorree tthhaann 11 hhoouurr..

•• AAllllooww tthhee ccrraannkkccaassee hheeaatteerr ttoo ooppeerraattee aa mmiinniimmuumm ooff 2244 hhoouurrss bbeeffoorree ssttaarrttiinngg ccoommpprreessssoorrss..

•• DDoo nnoott aallllooww lliiqquuiidd rreeffrriiggeerraanntt ttoo eenntteerr tthhee ssuuccttiioonn lliinnee..

•• DDoo nnoott aallllooww eexxcceessssiivvee lliiqquuiidd aaccccuummuullaattiioonn iinn tthhee lliiqquuiidd lliinneess..

•• DDoo nnoott ooppeerraattee tthhee ccoommpprreessssoorrss wwiitthhoouutt tthhee pprrooppeerr lleevveell ooff rreeffrriiggeerraanntt iinn eeaacchh cciirrccuuiitt..

To charge the system:

1. Verify system leak check (including interconnecting piping for air cooled systems) and evacuation are complete before adding refrigerant.

See “Refrigerant Leak Test Procedure,” p. 92 and

“System Evacuation Procedures,” p. 93

2. Ensure field-supplied unit disconnect is OFF. Verify that the unit 115 volt control circuit switch is OFF and reset relays have been unplugged, to prevent inadvertent compressor starts.

3. Turn field-supplied unit disconnect ON to energize crankcase heaters. Verify crankcase heaters are operating.

4. Verify all service valves are open.

5. See CSC General Data for unit refrigerant charge.

6. See for additional charge required based on field piping size and length. Add this to the charge amount from Step 5 for the total charge.

NNoottee:: Step 6 not required for field piping under 25

feet, or for water cooled system.

7. At the liquid line angle valve add as much R-410A LIQUID as possible up to, but not exceeding, total charge amount. Depending on conditions, it may not be possible to add more than 60% of the total charge. This will be adequate for compressor startup. More charge will be added after compressors are started. Use an accurate scale to measure and record preliminary amount of refrigerant added to each circuit.

NNoottee:: AAiirr CCoooolleedd OOnnllyy:: Add charge at the

condenser access valve or field supplied discharge line access valve. If angle valve is used for charging, liquid line solenoid valve should be open.

8. DO NOT add refrigerant in the suction line during preliminary charging to minimize refrigerant in system low side prior to compressor start.

9. Record charge amount added.

10. If total charge is not reached see Final Refrigerant Charge in Startup.

11. Verify wiring has been returned to original.

NNoottee:: AAiirr CCoooolleedd OOnnllyy:: Verify liquid line solenoid

valve has been returned to original.

Table 24. Charge add —lbs per 10 ft of line

Piping Size (in) Liquid Line (lbs)

5/8

7/8

1 1/8

1 3/8

Note: Amounts listed are for 10 ft of pipe above 25'. Actual

requirements will be in direct proportion to the actual length of piping.

1.07 -

2.23 0.31

- 0.53

- 0.80

Discharge Line

(lbs)

42

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Installation - Electrical

Unit Wiring Diagrams

Specific unit wiring diagrams are provided on the inside of the control panel door. Use these diagrams for connections or trouble analysis.

Supply Power Wiring

It is the responsibility of the installer to provide power supply wiring to the unit terminal block or the nonfused disconnect switch option. Wiring should conform to NEC and all applicable code requirements.

Bring supply wiring through the knockout in the lower left side of the unit control panel. Connect the three phase wires to the power terminal block or the nonfused disconnect switch in the control box terminals. Refer to specific wiring diagrams and fuse information in the control panel.

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss SSeerrvviiccee PPrroocceedduurreess!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww aallll pprreeccaauuttiioonnss iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaall aanndd oonn tthhee ttaaggss,, ssttiicckkeerrss,, aanndd llaabbeellss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. TTeecchhnniicciiaannss,, iinn oorrddeerr ttoo pprrootteecctt tthheemmsseellvveess ffrroomm ppootteennttiiaall eelleeccttrriiccaall,, mmeecchhaanniiccaall,, aanndd cchheemmiiccaall hhaazzaarrddss,, MMUUSSTT ffoollllooww pprreeccaauuttiioonnss iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaall aanndd oonn tthhee ttaaggss,, ssttiicckkeerrss,, aanndd llaabbeellss,, aass wweellll aass tthhee ffoolllloowwiinngg iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss:: UUnnlleessss ssppeecciiffiieedd ootthheerrwwiissee,, ddiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriiccaall ppoowweerr iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneecctt aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinngg ddeevviicceess ssuucchh aass ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaann nnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. WWhheenn nneecceessssaarryy ttoo wwoorrkk wwiitthh lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss,, hhaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd lliicceennsseedd eelleeccttrriicciiaann oorr ootthheerr iinnddiivviidduuaall wwhhoo hhaass bbeeeenn ttrraaiinneedd iinn hhaannddlliinngg lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss ppeerrffoorrmm tthheessee ttaasskkss..

NNOOTTIICCEE

UUssee CCooppppeerr CCoonndduuccttoorrss OOnnllyy!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo uussee ccooppppeerr ccoonndduuccttoorrss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn eeqquuiippmmeenntt ddaammaaggee aass tthhee eeqquuiippmmeenntt wwaass nnoott ddeessiiggnneedd oorr qquuaalliiffiieedd ttoo aacccceepptt ootthheerr ttyyppeess ooff ccoonndduuccttoorrss..

NNOOTTIICCEE

MMoottoorr DDaammaaggee!!

CCoorrrreecctt pphhaassee sseeqquueennccee iiss ccrriittiiccaall.. IIff pphhaassee sseeqquueennccee ooff tthhee iinnccoommiinngg lliinnee vvoollttaaggee iiss nnoott ccoorrrreecctt,, iitt ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn mmoottoorr ddaammaaggee..

Voltage Range

Voltages must be within ±10% the nameplate voltage. Ensure the unit voltage is balanced by measuring at the compressor terminals. Voltage imbalance on three phase systems can cause motor overheating and premature failure. Maximum allowable imbalance is

2.0%.

Voltage Imbalance

Read the voltage at the compressor terminals to determine if it is balanced. Voltage imbalance on three phase systems can cause motor overheating and premature failure. The maximum allowable imbalance is 2.0%. Voltage imbalance is defined as 100 times the sum of the deviation of the three voltages from the average (without regard to sign) divided by the average voltage. For example, if the three measured voltages are 221, 230, and 227, the average voltage would be:

(221 + 230 + 227) / 3 = 226 volts

The percentage of voltage imbalance is then: 100 * (226 — 221) / 226 = 2.2%

Phase Monitor

Unit is equipped with phase monitor in control box. The phase monitor will protect against phase loss, imbalance and reversal of line voltage. If a fault occurs, the red LED will energize. While the fault condition is present, the phase monitor interrupts the 115V control circuit. If no faults are observed, a green LED will be energized.

Control Power

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCoommppoonneenntt DDaammaaggee!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn iimmmmeeddiiaattee oorr pprreemmaattuurree ccoommppoonneenntt ffaaiilluurreess.. UUnniitt ttrraannssffoorrmmeerrss aarree ssiizzeedd ttoo pprroovviiddee ppoowweerr ttoo tthhee uunniitt oonnllyy.. DDoo nnoott uussee tthheessee ttrraannssffoorrmmeerrss ttoo ssuuppppllyy ppoowweerr ttoo ffiieelldd eeqquuiippmmeenntt..

In this example, 2.2% imbalance is not acceptable. Whenever a voltage imbalance of more than 2.0% exists, check the voltage at the unit disconnect switch. If the imbalance at the unit disconnect switch does not exceed 2.0%, faulty unit wiring is causing the imbalance. Conduct a thorough inspection of the unit electrical wiring connections to locate the fault, and make any repairs necessary.

Access the connection terminal block through the control panel on the upper left side of the unit. All wiring should conform to NEC and applicable local code requirements.

Be sure all wiring connections are secure. Reference the unit specific diagrams inside the control panel.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

43

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

NNoottee:: Unit transformers IT1, IT3, IT4 and IT5 are sized

to provide power to the unit only.

Determination of maximum fuse size (MFS) and maximum circuit breaker size (MCB):

MFS and MCB = 2.25 x largest motor amps (FLA or

Selection Procedures

RLA = rated load amps Compressor LRA = locked rotor amps Fan motor LRA = locked rotor amps, N.E.C. Table 430 150 FLA = full load amps, N.E.C. Table 430 - 150

Voltage utilization range is ±10%

Determination of minimum circuit ampacity (MCA).

MCA = 1.25 x largest motor amps/VFD amps (FLA or RLA) + the sum of the remaining motor amps.

RLA) + the sum of the remaining motor amps.

For units with the dual power option, there are two electrical circuits that need calculations using the previous formulas:

• Circuit #1— fans

• Circuit #2— compressors

If the rating value determined does not equal a standard current rating of over current protective device, use the next lower standard rating for the marked maximum rating.

Table 25. Number of compressors per unit

SCRF/SIRF

SCWF/SIWF

10 HP 1 3 2 - 1 - - 2 -

15 HP 1 - 1 3 3 4 5 4 6

25 - 29 30 - 35 40 50 60

29 - 32 35 - 38 42 - 46 52 - 58 65 - 72 80 90 100 110

Table 26. Compressor Electrical Data

SCWF/SIWF SCRF/SIRF

200V 460V 575V 200V 460V 575V

HP RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA HP RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA

10 41.4 267 18.6 142 15.8 103 10 41.4 267 18.6 142 15.8 103

15 56.9 351 25.5 197 23.1 146 15 56.9 351 25.5 197 23.1 146

Table 27. Fan motor electrical data

HP TYPE

5

7.5

10

15

20

25

30

OPD 15.3 109.0 6.6 48.0 5.2 40.0

TEFC 15.2 128.8 6.7 56.0 5.3 44.8

OPD 23.3 199.0 9.7 84.8 7.8 61.4

TEFC 22.1 164.0 9.6 70.9 7.7 56.9

OPD 29.5 260.0 12.6 118.0 10.1 72.3

TEFC 29.5 216.0 12.8 103.0 10.3 83.9

OPD 43.4 271.0 18.9 118.0 15.1 95.9

TEFC 42.5 288.0 18.5 125.0 15.0 102.0

OPD 57.0 350.0 24.5 156.0 19.6 126.0

TEFC 55.5 402.0 24.2 175.0 19.4 140.0

OPD 70.0 432.0 30.5 190.0 24.5 155.0

TEFC 71.0 523.0 30.5 188.0 24.5 140.0

OPD 82.2 514.0 36.6 252.0 29.0 200.0

TEFC 81.0 560.0 38.0 274.0 29.2 177.0

FLA LRA FLA LRA FLA LRA

200V 460V 575V

44

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Table 27. Fan motor electrical data (continued)

200V 460V 575V

HP TYPE

40

50

60 ODP

OPD 109.0 615.0 49.0 330.0 40.0 270.0

TEFC 111.0 758.0 47.4 320.0 38.0 280.0

ODP

TEFC

FLA LRA FLA LRA FLA LRA

N/A N/A

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

59.0 378.0 47.0 305.0

59.0 455.0 47.2 380.0

71.0 464.0

N/A N/A

Table 28. VFD electrical data

VFD L.I.C.

Without Bypass With Bypass

200V 460V 575V 200V 460V 575V

HP

7.5 23.8 10.6 8.8 32.2 10.6 8.8

10 32.2 14 11.1 48.3 14 16.6

15 48.3 21 16.6 61.9 21 16.6

20 61.9 27.6 21.4 78.2 27.6 21.4

25 78.2 34 26.3 92 34 26.3

30 92 41 31.2 117 41 31.2

40 117 53 39.9 139.2 53 39.9

50 NA 64 50.6

60 NA 77 NA

Note: Values are at the maximum VFD input rating and not the

reduced motor values. L.I.C. = Line Input Current.

n/a

64 50.6

77

Table 29. Single stage electric heat electrical data

SXWF

Size

20 - 18 50 21.7

22 - 18 50 21.7

25 20 18 50 21.7

29 25 23 63.8 27.7

32 29 23 63.8 27.7

35 30 27 75 32.5

38 35 27 75 32.5

42 - 31.5 87.4 37.9

46 40 31.5 87.4 37.9

52 - 39 108.3 46.9

58 50 39 108.3 46.9

65 - 48 133.2 57.7

72 - 48 133.2 57.7

SXRF

Size Heat Kw

200V

Amps

460V

Amps

n/a

Table 29. Single stage electric heat electrical data (continued)

SXWF

Size

80 60 48 133.2 57.7

Note: Electric heat amperage should not be considered when

determining minimum circuit ampacity. The current of the unit in the heating mode will not exceed the current of the unit in the cooling mode

SXRF

Size Heat Kw

200V

Amps

460V

Amps

Table 30. 2 stage electric heat electrical data

Unit Size

SCWF Heat kW

90 76

100 76

110 76

200V

Amps

N/A

460V

Amps

95.39

575V

Amps

N/A

Static Pressure Transducer Installation (VAV units only)

Supply air static pressure controls the inverter option. A static pressure head assembly ships separate in control panel for field installation in the supply air duct work. Installer is responsible for providing pneumatic tubing.

Transducer Location

Place head assembly in an area of ductwork that will provide an average and evenly distributed airflow pattern. Use the following guidelines to determine an appropriate installation location.

1. Locate static head assembly approximately 2/3 to 3/ 4 the way down longest duct run, in an area approximately 10 duct diameters downstream and 2 duct diameters upstream of major interferences, turns, or changes in duct diameter.

2. When installing pneumatic tubing between head assembly and transducer in control panel, do not exceed 250ft for 1/4” OD tubing or 500ft for 3/8” OD tubing.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

45

Duct

Pressure Sensor

Static Pressure Head Assembly

Connector for 1/4” Tubing

Sheet Metal Screws (provided by installer)

NOTE: Pleace sensor inlet perpendicular to airflow.

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

Installing the Transducer

Use the following procedure to properly install the static pressure transducer:

1. Mount pressure sensing head assembly in duct with sensing tip is in middle of the duct so that it will provide a proper pressure measurement. See

Figure 24, p. 46.

2. Connect the pneumatic tubing from the sensing head to the push-on tubing connection in the control panel. Use a plastic static pickup tubing. Do not exceed 250 feet for 1/4” OD tubing or 500 feet for 3/8” OD tubing.

Transducer inside control panel picks up low side or reference pressure.

NNoottee:: If plastic tubing pulls away from a connection,

trim it back before replacing it on the fitting. Stretched tubing may leak and cause faulty control.

Figure 24. Static pressure sensor installation

Zone Sensor Options for Control Units

Zone sensor options are available and can be ordered with the unit or after the unit ships. They also can be

ordered through “Unitary Accessories (ACC)”/“UPG Rooftop, Packaged Heat Pump, Split System Accessories (ACC)”. Contact your local Trane sales office. Following is a full description of zone sensors and their functions. Following is a full description of zone sensors and their functions. See Table 39, p. 70 for the zone sensor temperature vs. resistance coefficient curve.

Standard with All Units: BAYSENS077

Zone temperature sensor only

This zone sensor module ships with all units, and can be used with BAYSENS019, BAYSENS020, or BAYSENS021 remote sensors. When this sensor is wired to one of these remote zone sensors, wiring must be 18 AWG shielded twisted pair (Belden 8760 or equivalent). Refer to the specific zone sensor for wiring details. It provides the following features and system control functions:

• Remote temperature sensing in the zone

• Morning warm-up sensor

• Zone sensor for ICS™ systems

• Zone temperature averaging

When used as a remote sensor for standard zone sensor, the thermistor sensor must be disabled.

(Possible Schematic Designation(s): 5U23, 5U26, 5U30, and 5RT5.)

46

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

CV Unit Zone Sensor Options

BAYSENS108

Dual setpoint, manual/automatic changeover sensor

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

BAYSENS110

Dual setpoint, manual/automatic changeover sensor with system function

BAYSENS108 and BAYSENS110

These zone sensor modules are for use with cooling/ heating constant volume units. They have four system switch settings (heat, cool, auto, and off) and two fan settings (on and auto).The zone sensor provides either manual or automatic changeover control with dual setpoint capability.

BAYSENS108 and BAYSENS110 features and system control functions include:

• System control switch to select heating mode (HEAT), cooling mode (COOL), automatic selection of heating or cooling as required (AUTO), or to turn the system off (OFF).

• Fan control switch to select automatic fan operation while actively heating or cooling (AUTO), or continuous fan operation (ON).

• Dual temperature setpoint levers for setting desired temperature. The blue lever controls cooling, and the red lever controls heating.

• Thermometer to indicate temperature in the zone. This indicator is factory calibrated.

(Possible Schematic Designation: 5U29)

BAYSENS110 only function status indicator lights include:

• SYSTEM ON glows continuously during normal operation, or blinks if system is in test mode.

• COOL glows continuously during cooling cycles, or blinks to indicate a cooling system failure.

• HEAT glows continuously during heating cycles, or blinks to indicate a heating system failure.

• SERVICE blinks or glows to indicate a problem. These signals vary depending on the particular equipment being used.

(Possible Schematic Designation: 5U29)

Integrated Comfort Systems Sensors for CV and VAV Applications

CV and VAV Unit Zone Sensor Options

These zone sensor options are for use with cooling/ heating Integrated Comfort System (ICS) systems.

BAYSENS074

Zone temperature sensor with timed override and local setpoint adjustment

This electronic analog sensor features single setpoint capability and timed override with override cancellation. BAYSENS074 features and system control functions include:

• Remote temperature sensing in the zone

• A timed override button to move an ICS or a building management system from its “unoccupied” to “occupied” mode

• Thumbwheel for local setpoint adjustment

• A cancel button to cancel the “unoccupied override” command

(Possible Schematic Designation: 5U23)

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

47

RIGHT BACK

1-3/32 [27,43 mm]

3/32 [2,00 mm]

1-3/8 [35,00 mm]

19/32 [15,00 mm]

15/64 [6,00 mm]

3-5/32 [80,00 mm]

1-1/32 [26,16 mm]

5/32 [3,81 mm] 4X

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

BAYSENS073

Zone temperature sensor with timed override

This electronic analog sensor features single setpoint capability and timed override with override cancellation. It is used with a Trane® Integrated Comfort™ system.

BAYSENS073 features and system control functions include:

• Remote temperature sensing in the zone

• A timed override button to move an ICS or a building management system from its “unoccupied” to “occupied” mode

• Cancel button to cancel the “unoccupied override” mode

(Possible Schematic Designation: 5U23)

Figure 25. Zone sensor mounting hole locations for: BAYSENS077

Zone Sensor Installation

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabbllee ffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinngg ccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorr aalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

NNOOTTIICCEE

UUssee CCooppppeerr CCoonndduuccttoorrss OOnnllyy!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo uussee ccooppppeerr ccoonndduuccttoorrss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn eeqquuiippmmeenntt ddaammaaggee aass tthhee eeqquuiippmmeenntt wwaass nnoott ddeessiiggnneedd oorr qquuaalliiffiieedd ttoo aacccceepptt ootthheerr ttyyppeess ooff ccoonndduuccttoorrss..

48

NNoottee:: For additional information regarding the safe

discharge of capacitors, see PROD-SVB06

All sensor options ship in the main control panel and are field installed. Programmable option installation procedures.

Mounting Location

Mount the sensor on the wall in an area with good air circulation at an average temperature. Avoid mounting space temperature sensor is areas subject to the following conditions:

• Drafts or “dead” spots behind doors or in corners

• Hot or cold air from ducts

• Radiant heat from the sun or appliances

• Concealed pipes and chimneys

• Unheated or non-cooled surfaces behind the sensor, such as outside walls

• Airflows from adjacent zones or other units

To mount the sensors, remove the dust cover and mount the base on a flat surface or 2" x 4" junction box. Sensors ship with mounting screws.

Mounting the Subbase

Remove the zone sensor cover from subbase, and mount subbase on the wall or on a 2 x 4 junction box. Route wires through the wire access hole in the

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Junction

Mounting to Junction Box

Mounting Directly to the Wall

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

subbase. See Figure 26, p. 49. Seal the hole in the wall behind the subbase.

NNoottee:: Guidelines for wire sizes and lengths are shown

in Table 31, p. 49. The total resistance of these low voltage wires must not exceed 2.5 ohms per conductor. Any resistance greater than 2.5 ohms may cause the control to malfunction due to excessive voltage drop.

NNoottee:: Do not run low-voltage control wiring in same

conduit with high-voltage power wiring.

Wiring

1. Run wires between the unit control panel and the zone sensor subbase. To determine the number of wires required, refer to the unit wiring diagrams.

2. Connect the wiring to the appropriate terminals at the unit control panel and at the zone sensor subbase. In general, zone sensor connections to the unit use the convention of connecting zone sensor terminals to like numbered unit terminals (1 to 1, 2 to 2, etc.).The connection detail is shown on the unit wiring diagrams, which are located in the unit control panel.

3. Replace the zone sensor cover back on the subbase and snap securely into place.

Figure 26. Typical zone sensor installation

Programmable Zone Sensors

BAYSENS119

Standard Remote Sensor (BAYSENS077)

When using the remote sensor, BAYSENS077, mount it in the space that is to be controlled. Wire according to the interconnecting wiring diagrams on the unit.

Table 31. Zone sensor maximum lengths and wire

Distance from Unit to

size

Controller

Recommended Wiring

0-150 feet

151-240 feet 20 gauge

241-385 feet

386-610 feet 16 gauge

611-970 feet

Size

22 gauge

18 gauge

14 gauge

The BAYSENS119 programmable night set back sensor provides multi functional flexibility for both Constant Volume and Variable Air Volume control. This electronic programmable sensor includes auto or manual cooling and heating changeover with sevenday programming.

Five tactile feel buttons located on the sensor front panel provide interface for all programming, including initial setup for CV or VAV control. Sensor functionality includes up to four daily programmable periods for Occupied/Unoccupied operation, and Override. The dynamic LCD display indicates status for System On/ Off, Heat, Cool, Fan Status, Time of Day, Occupied/ Unoccupied mode, Space Temperature, Space or Discharge Air Heating and Cooling Setpoints. Additional features include Service Indication for Heat Failure, Cool Failure, Fan Failure, and Test Mode if system is operating in test mode.

A Check Filter Timer function is included. Filter service countdown time can be set in one-day increments. Activation of the Test/Configuration button located on the bottom of the sensor performs a sensor selfdiagnostic routine and indicates hours in service.

When the BAYSENS119 is programmed for Constant Volume or VAV control, Night Setback is initiated

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

49

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

through the scheduled Unoccupied time setting. When the sensor switches to Night Setback, the outdoor dampers close and heating/cooling functions are enabled/disabled based on set up parameters. As building load changes, If heating/cooling functions are enabled, the Sensor energizes self-contained unit and evaporator fan operation. The unit will cycle heating/ cooling operation throughout the Unoccupied period as required to maintain Unoccupied space temperature setpoints. When the Unoccupied time period has expired, all heating/cooling functions return to normal operation.

When Night Setback options are used with VAV heating/cooling, maintain airflow through the selfcontained unit by electronically tying the VAV terminals to the unoccupied output relay contacts on the selfcontained units low voltage terminal board, or by using changeover thermostats. Either of these methods will assure adequate airflow through the unit and satisfactory temperature control of the space.

NNoottee:: Refer to BAS-SVX17*-EN for complete

Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions.

Time Clock Option

Grasslin Time Clock Option

131°F.

2. Locate the time clock at least 5 feet away from any large electrical contact or machinery to avoid possible electrical interference problems.

3. Provide a separate independent circuit for the time clock power supply.

4. Since all electronic instruments are sensitive to voltage spikes, pay close attention to the following:

a. If possible, supply power to the electronic time

clock from a phase different than the one supplying power to the load.

b. Provide a suitable Varistor or RC network across

the INDUCTIVE LOADS supply terminals to reduce voltage spikes.

c. Place a diode across the DC OPERATED

INDUCTOR terminals to eliminate back EMF.

d. HIGHLY INDUCTIVE LOADS, especially

fluorescent lights, may require a relay in which case, then Step a and Step c apply.

The time clock can be surface or flush mounted. Lift off the front cover and loosen the two screws on opposite corners. Pull off the base’s plug with a left to right rolling motion.

Surface Mounting Inside Panel

1. Place screws through the base’s preset holes and screw to back of panel or wall.

2. Wire according to the instructions in the following section. Depending upon the specific installation, you may find it more convenient to complete wiring before attaching the base.

3. Place the terminal cover over the terminal block by aligning the two screws with the corner holes in the base.

4. Push the timer firmly onto the plug in the base.

5. Tighten the two screws. A base for DIN rail mounting is optional.

The time clock option has a programmable timer that is factory wired to the unoccupied input to provide on/off control. The time clock will not allow the unit to pass through the night setback/morning warm-up mode, except on units with optional night heat/morning warm-up, or programmable night setback.

The time clock, a “Digi 20” by Grasslin, is inside the control panel, but accessible with the control panel door closed. This same type timer is also used for programmable night setback/morning warm up. Programming instructions for the “Digi 20” timer are in the “Programming” section.

Installing the Time Clock

1. Ensure operating temperature is between 4°F and

50

Wiring the Time Clock

1. Wire 24, 120, or 220 VAC to input terminals. Make sure to apply correct voltage. Using incorrect voltage will void the warranty.

2. Connect wire to the screw terminals according to the unit wiring diagrams. Use 12 to 22 AWG wire.

Remote Human Interface Panel Installation

Human Interface (HI) Panel

The HI enables the user to communicate necessary unit operating parameters and receive operating status information from within the occupied space.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

The HI displays top level information in the LCD window, unless the operator initiates other displays, for the various unit functions. It also displays menu readouts in a clear language 2 line, 40 character format. The 16-key keypad allows the operator to scroll through the various menus to set or modify the operating parameters. See figure below to reference the Human Interface (HI) panel keypad.

Figure 27. Human interface (HI) panel keypad

Locate the RHI panel in an area that will ensure the communication link between the panel and the unit(s) does not exceed 5,000 feet maximum or pass between buildings. See Table 33, p. 51.

The run length of the low voltage AC power wiring to the remote HI must not exceed three ohms/conductor. Refer to Table 33, p. 51.

Table 32. Maximum communication link wiring

length

Max. Wire Length

1,000 ft up to 60 pf/ft

2,000 ft up to 50 pf/ft

3,000 ft up to 40 pf/ft

4,000 ft up to 30 pf/ft

5,000 ft up to 25 pf/ft

Note: pf/ft = picofarads/foot

Max. Capacitance

Between Conductors

Ambient Temperature and Humidity Limits

Ambient operating conditions:

• Temperature: 32 to 120°F

• Relative humidity: 10 to 90%, non-condensing

Ambient Storage Conditions

• Temperatures: -50 to 200°F

• Relative humidity: 5 to 95%, non-condensing

Table 33. Wiring recommendations for the remote HI

panel

Remote Human Interface Panel

The remote human interface (RHI) panel is identical to the unit mounted HI with the exception of the “unit select” key. This key allows the operator to switch from one unit to the next to program or view status information regarding a particular unit.

The RHI functions the same as the unit mounted HI with two exceptions. The first is the test start function. The operator can view the service parameters, but can only initiate the service test function at the unit. The RHI door has a locking screw to deter access by unauthorized personnel. Additionally, the RHI can control up to four different units.

Location Recommendations

The HI microprocessor module is mounted inside a molded plastic enclosure for surface mounting. It is not weatherproof. Therefore, it is only applicable for indoor use.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Distance to Remote HI Recommended Wire Size

0-460 feet

461-732 feet

733-1000 feet

18 gauge

16 gauge

14 gauge

Mounting the Remote Human Interface (RHI) Panel

The installer must provide all mounting hardware such as; hand tools, electrical boxes, conduit, screws, etc. Refer to Figure 28, p. 53 for the mounting hole and knockout locations.

Procedure

Refer to Figure 28, p. 53 and follow the procedure below for mounting the remote HI panel on a 4" x 4" electrical junction box. Place the microprocessor in a clean dry location during the enclosure mounting procedures to prevent damage.

51

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

1. Mount an electrical junction box in the wall so that the front edge of the box will be flush with the finished wall surface.

2. Prior to mounting the panel, the microprocessor module must be carefully removed from the enclosure. To remove the module:

a. Lay the remote panel face up on a flat surface

and remove the locking screw from the right hand bottom end of the panel.

b. Remove the recessed hinge screw from the left

hand bottom end of the panel.

c. Unlatch the door of the enclosure as if to open

it, and slide the left hand side of the door upward away from the hinge. Lay it aside.

d. With the key pad visible, remove the two screws

located on the right hand side of the key pad.

e. Carefully slide the key pad plate upward from

the bottom, releasing the extruded hinge pin from its socket at the top.

f. Set the microprocessor aside until mounting is

complete.

3. Remove the junction box knockout in the back of the enclosure.

NNoottee:: The top of the enclosure is marked “TOP.”

4. With the enclosure in the correct position; align the mounting holes around the knockout in the enclosure with the screw holes in the electrical handy box and secure with the appropriate screws.

5. Replace the microprocessor within the enclosure as follows:

a. Verify that the terminal block jumpers are

connected properly.

b. Slide the extruded hinge pin at the top left of the

key pad plate into the hole located at the top left hand side of the enclosure.

c. Slide the bottom of the plate into place, aligning

the two clearance holes with the screw holes on the right. Install the screws but do not tighten.

NNoottee:: If the two screws are not installed as

called out in the previous step, hold against the key pad plate while installing the door in the next step, to prevent it from falling out.

d. Slide the extruded hinge pin at the top left of the

door into the hole located under the bottom left side of the display.

e. Install and tighten the hinge screw located at the

bottom left side of the enclosure.

Wall Mounting the RHI Panel

1. Prior to mounting the panel, the microprocessor module must be removed from the enclosure. Complete Step 2 in the previous section before proceeding.

2. With the microprocessor removed, refer to Figure

28, p. 53 for the location of the mounting holes to

be used for wall mounting.

3. Place the enclosure against the mounting surface and mark the mounting holes.

NNoottee:: Note: The top of the enclosure is marked with

“TOP.”

4. With the enclosure in the correct position, remove the enclosure and drill the necessary holes in the surface for the appropriate fasteners, (plastic anchors, molly bolts, screws, etc.)

5. Remove the necessary knockouts for the wire or conduit entry before mounting the panel.

6. Place the enclosure back onto the surface and secure it with the appropriate screws.

7. Follow Step 5 in the previous section to replace the microprocessor within the enclosure.

52

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Figure 28. Remote HI mounting holes and knockout locations

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

Wiring the Remote Human Interface

WWAARRNNIINNGG

PPrrooppeerr FFiieelldd WWiirriinngg aanndd GGrroouunnddiinngg RReeqquuiirreedd!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww ccooddee ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. AAllll ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg MMUUSSTT bbee ppeerrffoorrmmeedd bbyy qquuaalliiffiieedd ppeerrssoonnnneell.. IImmpprrooppeerrllyy iinnssttaalllleedd aanndd ggrroouunnddeedd ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg ppoosseess FFIIRREE aanndd EELLEECCTTRROOCCUUTTIIOONN hhaazzaarrddss.. TToo aavvooiidd tthheessee hhaazzaarrddss,, yyoouu MMUUSSTT ffoollllooww rreeqquuiirreemmeennttss ffoorr ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg iinnssttaallllaattiioonn aanndd ggrroouunnddiinngg aass ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn NNEECC aanndd yyoouurr llooccaall// ssttaattee//nnaattiioonnaall eelleeccttrriiccaall ccooddeess..

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd wwaaiitt ffoorr DDCC ccaappaacciittoorrss ttoo ddiisscchhaarrggee bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. RReeffeerr ttoo tthhee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss rreeccoommmmeennddaattiioonnss ffoorr pprrooppeerr ddiisscchhaarrggee ttiimmee aass DDCC bbuuss ccaappaacciittoorrss rreettaaiinn hhaazzaarrddoouuss vvoollttaaggeess aafftteerr iinnppuutt ppoowweerr hhaass bbeeeenn ddiissccoonnnneecctteedd.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt// ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd bbeeffoorree ttoouucchhiinngg aannyy iinntteerrnnaall ccoommppoonneennttss..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

The remote human interface requires 24 VAC + 4 volts power source and a shielded twisted pair communication link between the remote panel and the interprocessor communication bridge (ICPB) module at the self-contained unit.

Field wiring for both the low voltage power and the shielded twisted pair must meet the following requirements:

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: To prevent control malfunctions, do not run

low voltage wiring (30 volts or less) in conduit with higher voltage circuits.

• All wiring must be in accordance with NEC and

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

53

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

local codes.

• Reference Table 33, p. 51 for recommended wiring distance and size.

• Communication link wiring must be 18 AWG shielded twisted pair (Belden 8760, or equivalent).

• Communication link must not exceed 5,000 feet maximum for each link. See Table 32, p. 51

• Do not run communication link between buildings.

Low Voltage (AC) Field Wiring Connections

1. To access the wire entry locations, open the RHI panel door and remove the two screws on the righthand side of the key pad.

2. Swing the keypad open, exposing both the wire entries and the back of the HI module.

3. Refer to Figure 28, p. 53 and connect one end of the three conductor 24 volt wires to the remote panel terminal strip (+), (-), and (ground).

Interprocessor Communication Bridge Module Wiring

1. Refer to the figure below and trim the outer covering of the shielded cable back approximately one inch.

2. Cut the bare shield wire off even with the outer covering.

3. Strip approximately 1/2" of insulation from each insulated wire in order to connect them to the terminal strip at the unit.

4. Wrap tape around any exposed foil shield and/or base shield wire.

NNoottee:: The communication link is polarity sensitive.

Figure 29. Dressing shielded twisted wire

3. Connect the white lead to the positive (+) terminal, the black lead to the negative (-) terminal, and the bare shield wire to the terminal at the remote human interface panel.

4. Close the key pad plate and install and tighten the two screws removed earlier.

5. Close the outer door and install the recessed locking screw at the bottom right hand side of the enclosure to prevent accidental starting of the unit by unauthorized personnel while completing the wiring at the self-contained unit.

At the Self-Contained Unit

1. Connect the opposite end of the three conductor 24volt wire to the appropriate terminal strip as follows:

NNoottee:: Although the 24 volt power is not polarity

sensitive, do not connect either the + (plus) or

- (minus) terminals from the remote panel to ground at the self-contained unit.

2. Connect the wire connected to the positive (+) terminal at the remote panel.

3. Connect the wire connected to the negative (-) terminal at the remote panel.

4. Connect the ground wire from the remote panel to the unit control panel casing.

5. Refer to the unit wiring diagram and connect the white lead to the positive (+) terminal and the black lead to the negative (-) terminal. (These terminals are numbered. Reference to color is for clarification to maintain polarity).

NNoottee:: To maintain polarity, do not connect the base

shield wire to ground at the self-contained unit.

Communication Link (Shielded Twisted Pair) Wiring

1. Trim the outer covering of the shielded cable back approximately 1 inch. See the “Dressing shielded twisted wire” figure above. Do not cut the bare shield wire off.

2. Strip approximately 1/2–inch of insulation from each insulated wire to connect them to the terminal strip at the remote panel.

54

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

Connecting to Tracer Summit

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabbllee ffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinngg ccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorr aalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

IntelliPak™ commercial self-contained (CSC) units operate with Trane building automation software, Tracer Summit version 10.0.4 or later or any OS2 operating system.

NNoottee:: Tape the non-insulated end of the shield on

shielded wire at the unit. Any connection between the shield and ground will cause a malfunction. If daisy-chained in the unit, splice and tape the shields to prevent contact with ground.

Communication Wiring

NNoottee:: Communication link wiring is a shielded, twisted

pair of wire and must comply with applicable electrical codes.

An optional communication link provides a serial communication interface (SCI) between Tracer Summit and each commercial self-contained (CSC) unit in the system. The CSC system can have a maximum of 12 CSC units per connection link to Tracer Summit. Use a single 18 AWG shielded, twisted pair wire with stranded, thinned copper conductors to establish each communication link between Tracer Summit and each unit.

Programming the Time Clock Option

Setting the Time Clock

Use the following instructions to set the time clock:

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: Depress the reset key before beginning to

set time and program.

1. Select military (24:00 hr.) or AM/PM (12:00 hr.) time mode by depressing and holding the “h” key while

pressing “+ 1h” key to toggle between military and AM/PM. (AM appears in the display when in AM/PM mode.)

2. Press and hold down “🕒” key.

3. If setting the time when daylight savings time is in effect, press “+ 1h” key once (+ 1h will appear in display).

4. Set hour with “h” key. If AM or PM does not appear in display, the unit is in military time. See note above to change display.

5. Set minutes with “m” key.

6. Press “Day” key repeatedly to the day of the week. (1 is Monday, 7 is Sunday)

7. Release “🕒” key, colon will begin flashing.

NNoottee:: If keys h + or m + are kept depressed for longer

than 2 seconds, a rapid advance of figures will result.

The “Digi 20” electronic time switch is freely programmable for each day of the week in one minute increments. For easy and quick programming, the following 4 block programs are available:

• Monday through Sunday

• Monday through Saturday

• Monday through Friday

• Saturday and Sunday

Programming the Time Clock

Use the following instructions to program the time clock:

1. Press “Prog.” key. 1234567 AM —:— will appear in display. (Pressing “Prog.” key again, display will show the number of free programs “Fr 20”). Press again to RETURN to 1st program.

2. Press “👌”key,“◉” ON symbol will appear. Pressing the key again will toggle to OFF “❍”. Select ON or OFF for the program.

3. Press “h+” to select hour for switching time.

4. Press “m+” to select minute for switching time.

5. If the program is to occur every day of the week, (24 hour time control) ignore “Day” key and press “Prog.” key to advance to program.

6. For 7 day time control, press “Day” key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 (Monday through Saturday) block of days appears in display. Pressing “Day” key again, 1 2 3 4 5 (Monday through Friday) appears in display. Repeated presses will cycle through all days of the week and back to 1 through 7 (Monday through Sunday). Select day or block of days desired.

7. Press “Prog.” key and repeat steps 2 through 6a to enter additional programs of ON and OFF times. (Note that more than one OFF time may be programmed, enabling automatic control or manual overrides.)

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

55

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn -- EElleeccttrriiccaall

8. Press “🕒” key to enter run mode.

Reviewing and Changing Programs

Use the following instructions to review and change programs:

1. To review a program at any time, press “Prog.” key. Programs display in the sequence they were entered with repeated presses of “Prog.” key.

2. To change a program, select that program as outlined in step 1. Enter the time of day and days of week just as in the programming steps above.The old program is overwritten with the new selections. Press “Prog.” to store the new program.

3. To delete an individual program, select the program as in step 1 and press “h” and “m” keys until “—: —” appears in the display. Press either “Prog.” or “¹” key until“—:—” flashes.The program is deleted after a few seconds.

Manual Override

While in the “run” mode (“🕒” symbol is displayed), pressing the “👌” key will reverse the load status (switch load off if it is on, or switch it on if it is off). A hand symbol appears in the display to indicate the override is active. At the next scheduled switching time, automatic time control resumes, eliminating the override.

Pressing the “👌” key a second time “◉” appears in the display indicating the load is permanently on.

Pressing the “👌” key a third time “❍” appears in the display indicating the load is permanently off.

Pressing the “👌” key a fourth time returns to automatic, “👌” appears in the display.

All days shown in the respective blocks will switch on (or off) at the selected hour and minute.

56

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Operating Principles

MWU Ventilation Enable

Morning Warmup Temperature

Control Sequences of Operation

Occupied/Unoccupied Switching

• Night setback zone sensor

• Field-supplied contact closure (hard wired binary input to RTM)

• Tracer Summit

• Factory-mounted time clock

Field-Supplied Occupied/Unoccupied Input on the RTM

This input accepts a field-supplied switch or contacts closure, such as a time clock, with a rating of 12 mA at 24 VDC minimum.

Tracer Summit System

The Tracer Summit system can control the occupied/ unoccupied status of the self-contained unit.

Factory-Mounted Time Clock

A time clock can control the occupied/unoccupied status of the self-contained unit.

Unoccupied Sequence of Operation

The unoccupied mode helps conserve energy during times when a building is usually unoccupied. When in unoccupied mode, the unit will control to the unoccupied setpoints (usually a lower heating setpoint and higher cooling setpoint). Setpoints can be programmed at the HI, Tracer Summit, or the night setback zone sensor.

The unit enters the unoccupied mode when the RTM receives a closed signal on the unoccupied input for more than five seconds. For units with supply air temperature control entering unoccupied mode, the following sequence will occur:

• Heating/cooling functions cease and the economizer option closes fully. The supply fan shuts down for proper cool-down time of the heat exchanger. However, the supply fan may remain on for a short period of time.

• After the supply fan shuts down, the occupied/ unoccupied relay energizes, and the VAV box stroke time begins. The VAV box stroke time is field adjustable to allow time for VAV boxes to go to the full open airflow position.

• After the max VAV box stroke time expires, the supply fan, economizer (if enabled), compressors, and heat are enabled to satisfy the unoccupied zone temperature setpoints.

NNoottee:: Unoccupied economizer operation can be

enabled or disabled at the HI or using Tracer Summit.

Figure 30. Typical cycling morning warm-up cycle

For units without volume control entering unoccupied mode, the following sequence will occur:

• The occupied/unoccupied relay energizes and the economizer option fully closes.

• The fan mode is set to auto and the unit will control to the unoccupied zone temperature setpoints.

With MWU enabled at the HI, if the zone temperature is below the MWU setpoint, the unit enters the MWU mode.

Morning Warm-up

This feature can be enabled at the HI, and can be used with factory- or field-installed heat. If MWU is not required disable the function in the setup menu at the HI. MWU transitions the zone from unoccupied to occupied. It will heat until the MWU setpoint is met. The unit is then released to occupied mode. Supply duct static pressure is maintained during this sequence. MWU can be set (at the HI) to function as either full or cycling capacity.

Full Capacity Morning Warm-up (MWU)

Full capacity morning warm-up uses full heating capacity to heat the zone as quickly as possible. Full heating capacity is provided until the morning warmup setpoint is met. At this point, the unit is released to daytime mode.

Cycling Capacity Morning Warm-up (MWU)

Cycling capacity morning warm-up provides a more gradual heating to overcome “building sink” as the zone is heated. Normal zone temperature control with varying capacity is used to raise the zone temperature to the MWU zone temperature setpoint. This method of warm-up is used to overcome the “building sink” effect.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

57

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

Reference Figure 30, p. 57 for a pictorial explanation of the cycling MWU sequence. Cycling capacity MWU will heat until MWU temperature setpoint is reached. Next, a 60-minute timer begins. If the building load reaches the MWU ventilation setpoint, or the 60 minutes expire, whichever is first, the airside economizer will control to the minimum position. MWU will end when the zone temperature rises above the MWU terminate setpoint.

Timed Override Activation—ICS™

This function is operational whenever the unit’s RTM module is used as the zone temperature sensor source, which can be set at the HI panel. When this function is initiated by the push of the override button on the zone sensor, the unit will switch to the occupied mode. Unit operation (occupied mode) during timed override is terminated by a signal from Tracer.

Timed Override Activation—Non-ICS

This function is active whenever the unit’s RTM module board is selected as the zone temperature source, which can be set at the human interface panel. When this function is initiated by the push of the override button on the zone sensor, the unit will switch to the occupied mode. Automatic cancellation of the timed override mode occurs after three hours of operation.

VAV Drive Max Output

This is a single-pole, double-throw relay rated at a maximum voltage of 24 vac, two amps max. The relay contacts of this relay switch when the unit goes from the occupied mode to the unoccupied mode by means of the unoccupied binary input, night setback zone sensor, or Tracer Summit. The contacts will stay switched during the unoccupied and morning warm-up mode. They will return to the position shown on the unit wiring diagram when the unit returns to the occupied mode. The intent of this binary output is to signal the VAV boxes or other terminal devices to go to a full open airflow position.

Occupied Sequence

All setpoints can be adjusted using the HI panel. Also, cooling/heating setpoints can be adjusted in the zone, if using an adjustable zone sensor. For a complete list of unit setpoint default values and ranges, see the IntelliPak™ Self-Contained Programming Guide, PKGSVP01*-EN.

Occupied Zone Temperature—Cooling

The unit transitions from unoccupied to occupied when the occupied/unoccupied input on the RTM is open for more than five seconds after having been closed. This input can be received from Tracer Summit, the remote NSB zone sensor, the timed override function, or a field supplied contact. Dependent on unit options and the HI programming, the following sequence will occur:

• The unit will begin MWU and then switch to the occupied mode after the MWU setpoint is met.

• Purge will be enabled by Tracer Summit. Then Tracer Summit will enable the occupied mode.

• The unit will switch from unoccupied to occupied control immediately.

Upon entering occupied mode, the occupied/ unoccupied relay will de-energize.

Zone Temperature Control (Unit Model Number Digit 9 = 4 or 5)

A zone sensor located directly in the space sends input to the RTM while the CV unit is in occupied cooling mode. When the unit is in occupied cooling, the RTM controls the zone temperature within the cooling setpoint deadband by modulating the economizer option and/or staging mechanical cooling on and off as required.

Supply Air Temperature Control (Unit Model Number Digit 9 = 1, 2, 3, or 6)

When the VAV unit is in occupied cooling, the RTM controls the supply air temperature to the specified supply air cooling setpoint by modulating the economizer option and/or staging mechanical cooling on and off as required. The changeover relay contacts (field supplied) must be open on units with hydronic heat for cooling to operate.

Cooling

Upon entering occupied mode, the RTM receives an input from either the HI, RHI, Tracer Summit, or the GBAS to start the supply fan. The RTM supply fan contacts close and energize the supply fan contactor. When the supply fan starts, the fan proving switch closes, signaling the RTM that airflow is established. The VFD will ramp the fan, and/or the airside economizer dampers will open to the user-defined minimum position.

When a cooling request is sent to the RTM from the zone sensor, the RTM evaluates the system operating conditions using the supply air and outdoor temperature input before sending the request to the MCM for mechanical cooling. If outdoor conditions (temperature and humidity) are suitable or the EWT is within specified setpoints, the RTM will attempt to use “free cooling” without using any compressors. The RTM will use either the airside or waterside economizer option. When outdoor air conditions are not suitable, only mechanical cooling will function and outside air dampers will remain at their minimum position. If the unit does not have an economizer, mechanical cooling will operate to satisfy cooling requirements.

58

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

Units With Economizer

If the entering condenser water temperature (units with a WSE) or the outside air enthalpy (units with an ASE) is appropriate to use “free cooling,” the economizer will attempt to satisfy the cooling zone temperature setpoint.

NNoottee:: When using an ASE with economizer enabled, O/

A temperature enable can be used instead of comparative enthalpy if the O/A temperature falls below the economizer setpoint.

Then compressors will stage on as necessary to maintain supply air temperature setpoint, which is user-defined at the HI. Minimum on/off timing of compressors prevents rapid cycling.

When both airside and waterside economizers are on a single unit, priority must be set at the HI. The economizer with the highest priority attempts cooling first. Once it is operating at its maximum, and if additional cooling is necessary, the other economizer enables before mechanical cooling begins.

Cooling/Waterside Economizer

Waterside economizing enables when the unit’s entering water temperature is below the unit’s entering mixed air temperature by 4°F plus the user adjustable economizer approach temperature. The approach temperature default is 4°F.

Waterside economizing disables when the unit’s entering water temperature is not below the unit’s entering mixed air temperature by at least the water economizer approach temperature (default value of 4° F).The economizer acts as the first stage of cooling. If the economizer is unable to maintain the zone (CV units) or supply air (VAV units) temperature setpoint, the compressor module will bring on compressors as required to meet the setpoint.

Cooling/Airside Economizer

On units with an airside economizer, a call for cooling will modulate the fresh air dampers open. The rate of economizer modulation is based on deviation of the zone temperature from setpoint; i.e., the further away from setpoint, the faster the fresh air damper will open. The first stage of cooling will start after the economizer reaches full open.

NNoottee:: The airside economizer will only function freely if

ambient conditions are below the enthalpy control settings or below the return air enthalpy if unit has comparative enthalpy installed. If outside air is not suitable for “economizing,” the fresh air dampers drive to the minimum open position. A field adjustable, factory default setting at the HI panel or Tracer Summit can provide the input to establish the minimum damper position.

When outdoor air conditions are above the setpoint or comparative enthalpy control setting, only mechanical

cooling will function and outside air dampers will remain at their minimum position.

Mechanical Cooling

If the zone temperature cannot be maintained within the setpoint deadband using the economizer option or if there is no economizer, the RTM sends a cooling request to the MCM. The compressor module checks the compressor protection circuit before closing stage one. After the first functional stage starts, the compressor module monitors the saturated refrigerant temperature and closes the condenser fan output contact when the saturated refrigerant temperature rises above the lower limit setpoint.

Air-Cooled Units Only

The compressor module closes the condenser fan output contact when the saturated refrigerant temperature rises above the lower limit setpoint.

Water-Cooled Units Only

The WSM modulates the condenser coil water valves to maintain condenser temperature, if applicable. Otherwise, it will check the entering condenser water temperature to ensure it is greater than 54°F or if not, it will lock out cooling.

Auto Changeover (Units with Heat Only)

When the system mode is in auto, the mode will change to cooling or heating as necessary to satisfy the zone cooling and heating setpoints. The zone cooling and heating setpoints can be as close as 2°F (1.1°C).

Occupied Zone Temperature—Heating

Relies on input from a sensor directly in the space, while a system is in occupied heating mode or an unoccupied period, to stage electric heat on and off or modulate the hydronic heating valve as required to maintain the zone temperature within the heating setpoint deadband. The supply fan will operate when there is a request for heat.

Electric Heat

On units with electric heat, the zone temperature can be controlled to a heating setpoint during the occupied mode by cycling a single stage electric heater. An interface can be provided for field supplied electric heat (up to three stages).The zone temperature heating setpoint and deadband are user defined at the HI panel.

Hydronic Heat: Hot Water or Steam

On units with hot water or steam heating, the zone temperature can be controlled to a heating setpoint during the occupied mode. The zone temperature heating setpoint and deadband are user defined at the HI panel or zone sensor. VAV occupied heating initiates by closing a field-supplied switch or relay contacts

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

59

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

connected to the changeover input on the RTM. Supply air static pressure is maintained.

Supply Air Setpoint Reset (VAV Units Only)

Supply air reset can be used to adjust the supply air temperature setpoint on the basis of a zone temperature or outdoor air temperature. Supply air reset adjustment is available at the HI panel for supply air heating and supply air cooling control.

Reset Based on Outdoor AirTemperature

Outdoor air cooling reset is sometimes used in applications where the outdoor temperature has a large effect on building load. When the outside air temperature is low and the building cooling load is low, the supply air setpoint can be raised, thereby preventing subcooling of critical zones. This reset can lower usage of mechanical cooling, thus savings in compressor kW, but an increase in supply fan kW may occur.

Outdoor air heating reset is the inverse of cooling, with the same principles applied.

For both outdoor air cooling reset and heating reset, there are three user defined parameters that are adjustable through the human interface panel:

• Beginning reset temperature

• Ending reset temperature

• Maximum amount of temperature reset

Reset Based on zone temperature

Zone reset is applied to the zone(s) in a building that tends to overcool or overheat. The supply air temperature setpoint is adjusted based on the temperature of the critical zone(s).This can have the effect of improving comfort and/or lowering energy usage. The user-defined parameters are the same as for outdoor air reset.

Supply AirTempering (Hot Water and Steam VAV Units Only)

When supply air temperature falls below the supply air temperature deadband low end, the heating valve modulates open to maintain the minimum supply air temperature setpoint.

Daytime Warm-up (Units with Supply Air Temperature Control Only)

During occupied mode, if the zone temperature falls to a preset, user-defined zone low limit temperature setpoint, the unit is put into daytime warm-up. The system changes over to CV heating, the VAV boxes drive full open. However, unit airflow modulation control operates to maintain duct static setpoint, and full heating capacity is provided until the daytime

warm-up setpoint is reached. The unit is then returned to normal occupied mode.

Supply AirTempering

Supply air tempering is available on units without volume control and with hot water, steam, or electric heat or units with supply air temperature control with steam or electric heat. When the unit is in heat mode but not actively heating, if the supply air temperature drops to 10°F (5.5°C) below the occupied zone heating temperature setpoint, electric heat will stage on or the hydronic valve will modulate to maintain a minimum supply air temperature. The unit transitions out of heat mode if the supply air temperature rises to 10°F (5.5°C) above the occupied zone heating temperature setpoint.

Changeover

This mode only functions on units with supply air temperature control with hydronic heat. When the changeover binary input is closed the unit will control to a discharge air heating setpoint. This setpoint is entered from the HI, and can be a higher temperature than the supply air cooling setpoint. This function maintains duct static pressure.

Thermostatic Expansion Valve

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!

DDoo nnoott ooppeerraattee wwiitthh wwaatteerr llooooppss wwiitthh lleessss tthhaann ffiivvee mmiinnuutteess cciirrccuullaattiioonn ttiimmee aass iitt ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ppoooorr ssuuppeerrhheeaatt ccoonnttrrooll aanndd ccoommpprreessssoorr ddaammaaggee..

Refrigerant system reliability and performance is heavily dependent upon proper superheat. The importance of maintaining the proper superheat cannot be overemphasized. Accurate measurements of superheat will provide the following information:

• How well the expansion valve is controlling the refrigerant flow.

• The efficiency of the evaporator coil.

• The amount of protection the compressor is receiving against flooding.

The expected range for superheat is 14-20°F at full load conditions. At part load, expect a properly adjusted expansion valve to control to 8-12°F superheat. Systems operating with lower superheat could cause serious compressor damage due to refrigerant floodback.

Compressors

Units use two sizes of hermetic scroll compressors, 10 and 15 hp, and have from two to six compressors. When viewing the front of the unit, compressors are identified A through F from left to right. The second compressor from the left, or B compressor, is always

60

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

the first to come on, unless locked out for a malfunction or shut off on frost protection. See Table

34, p. 62 for compressor cycling stages and Table 1, p. 14 and Table 2, p. 15 for percent cooling capacity by

stage.

R-410 compressors have belly band heaters that must be energized 24 hours before starting compressor. Power to the unit will energize the heaters. Heaters will be energized during the off-cycle as long as the unit has power. Failure to perform these pre-start instructions could result in compressor damage.

The control system logic permits compressor operation only after the supply fan is on. If the supply fan shuts down, compressors will not operate. Units without head pressure control (units with intermediate piping packages) will lock out mechanical cooling when the entering condenser water temperature falls below 54°F. Mechanical cooling will resume when the entering condenser water temperature exceeds 58°F.

When there are more than two compressors in an air cooled unit, the first two compressors are manifolded together. If there are four compressors, the second two are manifolded.

Compressor Cycling

Compressors cycle to maintain the operating state required by the temperature controls. In the event of a compressor failure, the next available compressor turns on. Refer to Table 34, p. 62 for compressor cycling by unit model and tons.

During normal conditions, compressors will not shut off until they have been on for at least three minutes and will not turn on until they have been off for at least three minutes. Normal operating conditions are established on an individual compressor basis. When a compressor starts, its timer also starts. The compressor evaporator circuit frost protection can override the “minimum” timer and reduce the five minute minimum required time period.

When the unit is powered up, or manually reset there will be a three to eight minute delay before the first compressor may be turned on as requested by the unit temperature control algorithm.

Compressor Lead/Lag Operation

Compressor lead/lag is a user-selectable feature at the HI panel and is available on all units. After each request for compressor operation, the lead refrigeration circuit or compressor switches, thereby causing a more equitable or balanced run time among compressors.

When lead/lag is enabled, each time the system cycles, it will alternate between the standard compressor staging and the lead/lag staging. Using Table 34, p. 62, a SXWF 29-ton unit will first stage compressor B then A, then AB for

first cycle and A, then AB for the second cycle. Appropriate condenser valves (water-cooled and condenser fans (air-cooled) will stage with appropriate compressors to maintain saturated condensing temperature. Enabling lead/lag may drop a cooling stage when compared to standard staging. See Table

34, p. 62 for compressor staging.

Step Control

Steps of mechanical cooling are control based on supply air or zone temperature. See Table 34, p. 62 for compressor staging.

Capacity is based on an integrating control concept. The unit capacity matches the existing load and maintains an average supply air temperature within the supply air setpoint temperature control band region.

The supply air temperature control band is centered around supply air temperature setpoint and is adjustable from 2 to 12°F. In a steady state, the unit will either maintain a constant level of cooling capacity with the supply air temperature within the control band, or the highest active cooling level will cycle to provide an average supply air temperature equal to the setpoint.

If the supply air temperature swings outside the limits of the control band, the mechanical cooling capacity will increase or decrease by one level accordingly. The change occurs by integrating the temperature offset from the control band limit.

A minimum time delay of five minutes follows each change in cooling level. This time delay promotes stability by allowing the system to respond to the change before any further control action occurs. As the supply air temperature approaches setpoint, the time duration between changing levels of cooling capacity increases.

See Figure 31, p. 62 for the typical unit operating curve.

Figure 32, p. 62 shows typical unit performance when

supply air temperature swings exceed the control band limits.

Adjust the supply air temperature control band according to the desired unit performance. Increasing the control band reduces the equipment cycle rate and increases the maximum potential supply air temperature deviation from setpoint. Conversely, decreasing the control band reduces the maximum potential temperature deviation, but increases the compressor cycle rate.

Follow these recommendations concerning the supply air temperature control band settings based on expected unit sizing:

• 2 Cooling stage unit: 9°F

• 3 Cooling stage unit: 7°F

• 4 Cooling stage unit: 6°F

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

61

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

Table 34. Compressor stages

Refrigerant

Unit Size

SXWF 20, 22, 25 Independent

SXWF 29, 32 SXRF 25, 29

SXWF 35, 38 Independent

SXRF 30, 35

SXWF 42, 46 Independent

SXRF 40 Manifolded 15 10 10

SXWF 52, 58 Independent

SXRF 50 Manifolded 15 15 15

SXWF 65, 72 Independent

SXWF 80

SXRF 60 Manifolded 15 15 15 15

SCWF 90

SCWF 100

SCWF C1

Circuit Type

Independent

Manifolded 10 10 10

Independent

Compressor by Stage

A B C D E F

10 10

15 10

10 10 10

15 10 10

15 15 15

15 15 15 10

15 15 15 15

15 15 15 15 15

15 15 15 15 10 10

15 15 15 15 15 15

Figure 31. Typical pulldown curve for unit operating properly within control band

Compressor Staging Compressor Staging

B/AB A/AB

B/A/AB A/AB

B/BC/ABC A/AC/ABC

B/A/AC/ABC C/AC/ABC

B/BC/ABC A/AC/ABC

B/BD/ABD/ABCD A/AD/ACD/ABCD

B/BD/ABD/ABCD A/AC/ABC/ABCD

A/AB/ABC/ABCDE C/CDE/ACDE/BCDEF

A/AB/ABCD/ABCDEF CD/CDEF/ACDEF/ABCDEF

compressor off during the first two to three minutes after startup. This prevents possible nuisance trips during low ambient start conditions. See Table 35, p.

62.

Each compressor’s discharge line contains a high pressure cutout. Under abnormal operating conditions, the cutout will open to stop compressor operation.

Table 35. Pressure cutouts (open/close)

Figure 32. Typical pulldown curve for unit operating improperly outside control band

Compressor Safety Devices

If a compressor low pressure cutout opens during compressor startup, the UCM will not shut the

62

Unit Model

SXWF

SXRF

High Pressure

Cutout

553/424 49/74

650/500 36/61

Low Pressure

Cutout

Low Ambient Compressor Lockout

This function will lock out the compressor if the outdoor air temperature sensor reads an outdoor temperature below the low ambient compressor lockout temperature setpoint. This setpoint is adjustable at the human interface panel. Compressors will lock out when outdoor air temperature falls below that selected temperature and will start again when the temperature rises 5°F above the setpoint.

Evaporator Coil Frost Protection FROSTAT

The FROSTAT™ system eliminates the need for hot gas bypass. It utilizes an evaporator temperature sensor

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

mounted on the suction line near the TXV bulb of each circuit to protect the evaporator from freezing.

If the evaporator temperature approaches the specified setpoint (adjustable between 25 and 35°F at the HI) the compressor(s) will cycle off. The supply fan remains on to help de-ice the coil. The compressors will restart when the evaporator temperature has risen 10°F above the specified cutout temperature and when the compressor(s) have been off a minimum of three minutes. This prevents rapid cycling of the compressors.

Service Valve Option

If ordered, service valves are factory installed on each circuit before and after the compressor to allow compressor isolation for servicing.

Waterside Components

Waterside components consist of water piping, water valves, water flow switch option, water cooled condensers (SXWF only), and the economizer option.

Water Purge

NNOOTTIICCEE

PPrrooppeerr WWaatteerr TTrreeaattmmeenntt RReeqquuiirreedd!!

TThhee uussee ooff uunnttrreeaatteedd oorr iimmpprrooppeerrllyy ttrreeaatteedd wwaatteerr ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ssccaalliinngg,, eerroossiioonn,, ccoorrrroossiioonn,, aallggaaee oorr sslliimmee.. UUssee tthhee sseerrvviicceess ooff aa qquuaalliiffiieedd wwaatteerr ttrreeaattmmeenntt ssppeecciiaalliisstt ttoo ddeetteerrmmiinnee wwhhaatt wwaatteerr ttrreeaattmmeenntt,, iiff aannyy,, iiss rreeqquuiirreedd.. TTrraannee aassssuummeess nnoo rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy ffoorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt ffaaiilluurreess wwhhiicchh rreessuulltt ffrroomm uunnttrreeaatteedd oorr iimmpprrooppeerrllyy ttrreeaatteedd wwaatteerr,, oorr ssaalliinnee oorr bbrraacckkiisshh wwaatteerr..

This user-definable feature allows the user to select a purge schedule to automatically circulate water through the economizer and condensers periodically during non-operational times. This allows fresh chemicals to circulate in waterside heat exchangers. This feature is on all units and is defined at the HI.

Water Piping Options

Water piping is factory-installed with left-hand connections on units without a waterside economizer. Units can be ordered with either basic piping or intermediate piping. Also, units with waterside economizers can be set for either variable or constant water flow at the HI. See Figure 33, p. 64 and Figure

34, p. 64 for detailed piping configuration information.

With compatible piping configurations, the unit can be configured to provide:

• Constant water flow with basic or intermediate piping or

• Variable water flow (head pressure control) with intermediate piping only.

Constant water flow is for condenser pumping systems that are not capable of unloading the water-pumping system. Variable water flow maximizes energy saving by unloading the water pumping system.

Basic Water Piping

This option is available on units without a waterside economizer and with condenser water applications above 54°F (12.2°C) that do not require condensing pressure control. Left hand water connections and piping are extended to the unit exterior. Manifold piping is factory installed.

Intermediate Water Piping

This option provides condensing temperature control when the unit is configured (user defined at the HI) for variable water flow with or without a waterside economizer. A two-way modulating control valve is wired and installed in the unit to maintains a specific range of water temperature rise through the condenser when entering fluid temperature is less than 58°F (15° C).This option allows the compressor to operate with entering fluid temperature down to 35°F (2°C).The minimum valve position to maintain minimum condenser flow rates is user-defined at the HI. This valve drives closed if the unit shuts down or if a power failure occurs.

Water Flow Switch Option

A water flow switch is factory installed in the condenser water pipe within the unit. Whenever the flow switch detects a water flow loss prior to or during mechanical cooling, compressor operation locks out and a diagnostic code displays. If water flow is restored, the compressor operation automatically restores.

Water-Cooled Condensers

Units that are set up for variable water flow will modulate a water valve to maintain a user-defined condensing temperature setpoint. Condensing temperature will be referenced utilizing factory installed sensors located at each condenser.

Table 36. Condenser water piping connection sizes

Outlet

pipe

Unit size

SXWF 20, 22, 25, 29, 32, 35, 38

SXWF 42, 46, 52, 58, 65, 72, 80,

90, 100, 110

Inlet pipe

2 1/2 NPT 2 1/2 NPT

3 NPT 3 NPT

Waterside Economizer Option

The waterside economizer option takes advantage of cooling tower water to either precool the entering air to

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

63

Condenser 1

Condenser 2

Condenser 3

Condenser 4

Condenser 1

Condenser 2

Condenser 3

Condenser 4

V2

Condenser 1

Condenser 2

Condenser 3

Condenser 4

V1

Economizer

Variable Water Flow Waterside Economizer

Variable or Constant Water Flow

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

aid the mechanical cooling process or, if the water temperature is low enough, provide total system cooling. Waterside economizing enables when the unit’s entering water temperature is below the unit’s entering mixed air temperature by a minimum of 4°F plus the economizer’s approach temperature. The approach temperature default is 4°F. Waterside economizing disables when the unit’s entering water temperature is not below the unit’s entering mixed air temperature by at least the water economizer approach temperature. The approach temperature defaults to 4° F. The economizer acts as the first stage of cooling. If the economizer is unable to maintain the supply air setpoint, the unit control module brings on compressors as required to meet the setpoint.

The waterside economizer includes a coil, modulating valves, controls, and piping with cleanouts. The coil construction is ½-inch (13 mm) OD seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins. The evaporator and economizer coils share a common sloped (IAQ) drain pan. Drain pan options are either galvanized or stainless steel, and are insulated and internally trapped.

The waterside economizer coil is available with either a two or four row coil, with no more than 12 fins per inch.

The tubes are arranged in a staggered pattern to maximize heat transfer. The coil has round copper supply and return headers with removable cleanout and vent plugs. The optional mechanical cleanable economizer has removable cast iron headers to allow easy mechanical cleaning of the tubes. The waterside working pressure is rated for 400 psig (2758 kPa).

the condenser bypass valve modulate in- dependently of each other. When the economizer valve is active, all the water flowing through the economizer exits into the condensers. The software reads the saturated condenser water temperature for each circuit; trying to maintain 100 degrees saturated condenser temperature. Whichever circuit is the furthest away (either above 120 degrees or below 80 degrees) drives the software to modulate the condenser bypass valve either towards open or towards closed respectively. Eventually a balance will be reached until the saturated condenser temperatures change again. Both valves close whenever mechanical cooling is not required, and in the event of a power failure.

If the unit does not have a waterside economizer then variable water flow is automatically active with intermediate piping.

Figure 33. Basic water piping, constant water flow

Waterside Economizer Flow Control

Units equipped with a waterside economizer can be set from the human interface panel for variable or constant water flow.

Constant Water Flow with Intermediate Piping

Two-way modulating control shutoff valves are wired, controlled, and installed in unit. One valve is located in economizer’s water inlet, and the other in condenser bypass water inlet. When waterside economizer enables, two-way valves modulate to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. As economizer valve opens, condenser bypass valve closes, and vice versa. Full water flow is always maintained through condensers. Both valves will close in event of a power failure.

Figure 34. Intermediate water piping, variable water flow (L) and Intermediate piping with waterside economizer, variable or constant water flow (R)

Variable Water Flow with Intermediate Piping

Two-way modulating control shutoff valves are wired, controlled, and installed in the unit. One valve is located in the economizer’s water inlet, and the other is in the condenser water inlet. The economizer valve and

64

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

Unit Airside Components

The air delivery system consists of dampers, enthalpy switch option, airside economizer option, filters, low ambient sensors, and factory mounted single or double wall plenums.

Supply Air Fan

The unit has two supply fans on a single shaft that run

the VFD option with supply air temperature control (VAV) that modulates airflow based on supply air duct static pressure. Pressing the stop key on the HI will turn the supply fan off. The fan is on continuously when a CV unit is in occupied mode and except when a unit is in the night heat/morning warm-up mode. During the night heat and setback mode the fan cycles on and off in response to a call for heat.See supply fan table below for available fan horsepower.

at a constant speed (CV). However, the fans may have

Table 37. Supply fan horsepower selections

Unit Model HP

SXRF SXWF 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60

20, 22, 25

25, 29 29, 32

30, 35 35, 38

40

50

60

42, 46

52, 58, 65

72, 80

90, 100, 110

X X X X X

X X X X X X

X X X X X X X

Low Entering Air Temperature Sensor

This is standard on all units with a hydronic coil or waterside economizer. It can also be ordered as an option.

A thermostat limit switch is factory mounted on the entering air side of the unit with a capillary tube serpentine across the coil face. If the temperature falls below 35°F (2°C), the fan shuts down and the waterside economizer and/or hydronic heat valve options open to allow full water flow. The heat output also energizes. A manual reset is required. The low entering air temperature setpoint is adjustable at the HI.

High Duct Temperature Thermostat

A factory-supplied temperature limit switch with reset element detects the supply air duct temperature. This sensor should be field-installed downstream from the discharge in the supply air duct. If the supply air duct temperature exceeds 240°F (115.6°C), the unit shuts down and displays a diagnostic. A manual reset is required at the unit. High duct temperature can be adjusted at thermostat.

Dirty Filter Sensor Option

A factory installed pressure switch senses the pressure differential across the filters. When the differential pressure exceeds 0.9 inches (23 mm) WG, contact closure occurs and the HI will display a diagnostic. The unit will continue to run until you replace the air filters.

A field installed indicator device may be wired to relay terminals to indicate when filter service is required.

Contacts are rated at 115 VAC and are powered by a field-supplied transformer.

Low Ambient Sensor (Air-Cooled Units)

Low ambient sensor is field-installed on air-cooled units. Position it in a location subject to ambient temperatures only and not exposed to direct sunlight or exhaust fans.

The low pressure cutout initiates based on the ambient temperature. A time delay on the low pressure cutout initiates for ambient temperatures between 50 (zero minutes) and 0°F (10 minutes).This helps to prevent nuisance low pressure cutout trips.

Supply Air Static Pressure Limit

The opening of the VAV boxes coordinate during unit startup and transition to/from occupied/unoccupied modes to prevent supply air duct over pressurization. However, if for any reason the supply air pressure exceeds the user-defined supply air static pressure limit set at the HI panel, the supply fan VFD shuts down. The unit will attempt to restart, up to three times. If the over pressurization condition still occurs on the third restart, the unit shuts down and a manual reset diagnostic sets and displays at the HI.

Variable Frequency Drive Option

Variable frequency drive (VFD) is driven by a modulating 0-10 vdc signal from the RTM module. A pressure transducer measures duct static pressure, and the VFD adjusts fan speed to maintain the supply air

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

65

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

static pressure within an adjustable user-defined range. The range is determined by the supply air pressure setpoint and supply air pressure dead band, which are set at the HI panel.

VFDs provide supply fan motor speed modulation. The drives will accelerate or decelerate as required to maintain the supply air static pressure setpoint.

VFD with Bypass

Bypass control is an option that provides full nominal airflow in the event of drive failure. The user must initiate the bypass mode at the HI panel. When in bypass mode, VAV boxes need to be fully open. The self-contained unit will control heating and cooling functions to maintain setpoint from a user-defined zone sensor. Supply air static pressure limit is active in this mode.

For more detailed information on VFD operation, reference VFD technical manual that ships with the unit.

Airside Economizer Option

Units with the airside economizer option are equipped with the necessary control sequences to use outside air for the first stage of cooling, in occupied or unoccupied mode and when ambient conditions are favorable for economizing. Inherent in the unit controller is the ability to suppress the setpoint below the normal unit setpoint. This allows the building to improve comfort levels when possible, and at the same time, optimize building mechanical cooling operation for peak operating efficiency. An outside air temperature and relative humidity sensor are provided to allow monitoring of reference enthalpy and are field installed.

If the unit has the ECEM board, economizer operation enables when the outside air enthalpy is less than 25 BTUs/lb. default (adjustable 19-28 BTUs/lb). During occupied mode, the outside air damper opens to 15% (adjustable 0-100% at the HI) for ventilation purposes. Also, the ability to alter the outside air damper position to compensate for VAV supply air modulation is inherent in the unit controls, and can be enabled by the operator.

If the unit does not have an ECEM board, it will economize when the O/A temperature falls below the O/A economizer setpoint.

The mixing box fabrication is galvanized steel. Opposed low leak damper blades are fabricated from galvanized steel and rotate on rustproof nylon bushings. A factory installed 24V modulating spring return actuator controls both damper positions.

When outdoor conditions are not suitable for economizer cooling, the enthalpy control disables the economizer function and permits the outdoor air damper to open only to the minimum position.

On water-cooled units, compressor operation lockout will not occur at low ambient air temperatures. However, lockout will still occur via low condenser water temperature.

The outdoor air dampers drive fully closed whenever the supply air fan is off, provided there is power to the unit.

Comparative Enthalpy Control

Comparative enthalpy controls the economizer operation and measures temperature and humidity of both return air and outside air to determine which source has lower enthalpy. This allows true comparison of outdoor air and return air enthalpy by measurement of outdoor air and return air temperatures and humidities. A factory-installed control board, with field-installed outside and return air temperature and relative humidity sensors, allows monitoring of outside and return air.

NNoottee:: If comparative enthalpy is not ordered, standard

method is to compare outdoor air enthalpy with the fixed reference enthalpy. The reference enthalpy is set through the human interface panel.

Units with comparative enthalpy control are equipped with the necessary control sequences to allow using outside air for the first stage of cooling, in occupied or unoccupied mode and when ambient conditions are favorable for economizing. Inherent in the unit controller is the ability to suppress the setpoint below the normal unit setpoint. This allows building to improve comfort levels when possible, and at the same time, optimize building mechanical cooling operation for peak efficiency.

Economizer operation enables when the outside air enthalpy is 3 BTU/lb less than the return air enthalpy. During occupied mode, the outside air damper opens to 15% (adjustable 0-100%) for ventilation purposes. Also, the ability to alter the outside air damper position to compensate for VAV supply air modulation is inherent in the unit controls, and can be enabled by the operator.

The mixing box fabrication is galvanized steel. Opposed low leak damper blades are fabricated from galvanized steel and rotate on rustproof nylon bushings. A factory installed 24V modulating spring return actuator controls both damper positions.

Airside Economizers with Traq Damper

Outside air enters the unit through the Traq™ damper assembly and is measured by velocity pressure flow rings. The velocity pressure flow rings are connected to a pressure transducer/solenoid assembly, which compensates for temperature swings that could affect the transducer. The ventilation control module (VCM) utilizes the velocity pressure input, the RTM outdoor air temperature input, and the minimum outside air cfm

66

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Increasing Concentration

Carbon Dioxide Reset

Maximum Airflow

Increasing Reset Amount

O.A CFM Setpoint

Carbon Dioxide Reset Start

Carbon Dioxide Maximum Reset

OOppeerraattiinngg PPrriinncciipplleess

setpoint to modify the volume (cfm) of fresh air entering the unit as the measured airflow deviates from setpoint.

When the optional preheat temperature sensor is installed at the auxiliary temperature on the VCM and the preheat function is enabled, the sensor will monitor the combined (averaged) fresh air and return air temperatures. As this mixed air temperature falls below the preheat actuate temperature setpoint, the VCM activates the preheat binary output to control a field-installed heater. The output deactivates when the temperature rises 5°F above the preheat actuate temperature setpoint.

Using a field-installed CO enabled, as the CO CO

reset start value, the VCM modifies the minimum

2

sensor with CO2reset

2

concentration increases above the

outside air cfm setpoint to increase the amount of fresh air entering the unit. The setpoint adjusts upward until reaching the CO

maximum reset value. The maximum

2

effective (reset) setpoint value for fresh air is limited to the system’s operating cfm. As the CO

concentration

2

decreases, the effective (reset) setpoint value adjusts downward toward the minimum outside air cfm setpoint. See CO vs. CO

concentration curve.

2

Figure 35. CO

reset figure below for an airflow cfm

2

reset function, outside air vs. CO

2

Standard Two-Position Damper Interface

Units with the two-position damper interface are provided with a 0-10 VDC control output suitable for controlling a field-provided modulating actuator. In occupied mode, the output drives to the maximum position.

Airside Economizer Interface

Units with airside economizer interface are equipped with the necessary control sequences to allow using outside air for first stage of cooling, in occupied or unoccupied mode and when ambient conditions are favorable for economizing. Inherent in unit controller is the ability to suppress setpoint below normal unit setpoint. This allows the building to improve comfort levels when possible, and at the same time, optimize

building mechanical cooling operation for peak operating efficiency. An outside air temperature and relative humidity sensor are provided for field installation to monitor reference enthalpy. Economizer operation enables when the outside air enthalpy is less than 25 BTu/lb (adjustable 19-28 BTu/lb.). During occupied mode, the outside air damper opens to 15% (adjustable 0-100%) for ventilation purposes. Also, the ability to alter the outside air damper position to compensate for VAV supply air modulation is inherent in the unit controls, and can be enabled by the operator. An analog 2-10VDC output (adjustable (0-10 VDC) is provided to modulate the field-provided 30 second damper actuators (adjustable 1-255 seconds).

Airside Economizer Interface with Comparative Enthalpy

Units with airside economizer interface and comparative enthalpy are equipped with the necessary control sequences to allow using outside air for the first stage of cooling, in occupied or unoccupied mode and when ambient conditions are favorable for economizing. Inherent in the unit controller is the ability to suppress the setpoint below the normal unit setpoint. This allows the building to improve comfort levels when possible, and at the same time, optimize building mechanical cooling operation for peak operating efficiency. A factory-installed control board, with outside and return air temperature and relative humidity sensors, are provided for monitoring outside and return air. The sensors are field installed. Economizer operation enables when the outside air enthalpy is 3 BTU’s/lb. less than the return air enthalpy. During occupied mode, the outside air damper opens to 15% (adjustable 0-100%) for ventilation purposes. Also, the ability to alter the outside air damper position to compensate for VAV supply air modulation is inherent in the unit controls, and can be enabled by the operator. An analog 2-10 VDC output (adjustable (0-10 VDC) is provided to modulate the field-provided 30second damper actuators (adjustable 1-255 seconds).

Air-Cooled Condensers

Model SXRFunits are designed for use with the remote air-cooled condenser, model CXRC. For more information, see the Installation, Owner, and Maintenance Manual for Air-cooled Condenser, CXRC- SVX01*-EN. See for CXRC refrigerant connection sizes.

Condenser fans will stage per a user-defined setting. If the condenser is equipped with head pressure control (air modulation on last stage of condenser capacity), the condenser airflow will modulate to maintain condensing temperature setpoint. Condensing temperature is determined by sensors located at each condenser coil.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

67

Controls

Points List

RTM Module

Binary Inputs

• Emergency stop

• External auto/stop

• Unoccupied/occupied

• Dirty filter

• VAV changeover with hydronic heat

Binary Outputs

• VAV box drive max (VAV units only)

• CV unoccupied mode indicator (CV units only)

• Alarm

• Fan run request

• Water pump request (water-cooled only)

Analog Input

• Airside economizer damper minimum position

Analog Output

• Outside air damper actuator

Heat Module:

• Analog output

ECEM Module

Analog Inputs

• Return air temperature

• Return air humidity

IInn aaddddiittiioonn,, uunniittss wwiitthh aa VVOOMM hhaavvee::

Binary Inputs

• VOM mode A, unit off

• VOM mode B, pressurize

• VOM mode C, exhaust

• VOM mode D, purge

• VOM mode E, purge w/duct pressure control

Binary Output

• V.O. relay

BCI-I option

For BACnet® Points List. refer to ACC-SVP01*-EN.

LCI-I Points List

Refer to the LonTalk™ Communications Interface for Intellipak and Commercial Self-Contained Integration Guide, BAS-SVP02*-EN.

GBAS Module

Binary Inputs

• Demand limit contacts

Binary Outputs

• Dirty filter relay

• Refrigeration fail relay

• Heat fail relay

• Supply fan fail relay

• Active diagnostics

Analog inputs

• Occupied zone cooling setpoint

• Occupied zone heating setpoint

• Unoccupied zone cooling setpoint

• Unoccupied zone heating setpoint or minimum outside air flow setpoint

• Supply air cooling setpoint

• Supply air heating setpoint

• Supply air static pressure setpoint

Phase Monitor

Unit is equipped with phase monitor in control box. The phase monitor will protect against phase loss, imbalance and reversal of line voltage. If a fault occurs, the red LED will energize. While the fault condition is present, the phase monitor interrupts the 115V control circuit. If no faults are observed, a green LED will be energized.

Unit Control Components

The self-contained unit is controlled by a microelectronic control system that consists of a network of modules. These modules are referred to as unit control modules (UCM). In this manual, the acronym UCM refers to the entire control system network.

These modules perform specific unit functions using proportional/integral control algorithms. They are mounted in the unit control panel and are factory wired to their respective internal components. Each module receives and interprets information from other unit modules, sensors, remote panels, and customer binary contacts to satisfy the applicable request; i.e., economizing, mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation.

Following is a detailed description of each module’s function.

68

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

CCoonnttrroollss

RTM Module Board—Standard on all Units

The RTM responds to cooling, heating, and ventilation requests by energizing the proper unit components based on information received from other unit modules, sensors, remote panels, and customer supplied binary inputs. It initiates supply fan, exhaust fan, exhaust damper, or variable frequency drive output, and airside economizer operation based on that information.

Reference the RTM points list on page 70.

NNoottee:: Emergency stop and external auto/stop, stop the

unit immediately, emergency stop generates a manual reset diagnostic that must be reset at the unit human interface. External auto-stop will return the unit to the current operating mode when the input is closed, so this input is auto reset.

RTM Remote Economizer Minimum Position

The remote minimum position potentiometer, BAYSTAT023A, provides a variable resistance (0-270 ohms) to adjust the economizer minimum position from 0 to 100% when connected to the economizer remote minimum position input of the RTM. The RTM must be selected as the source for economizer minimum position. If the RTM is the selected source for economizer minimum position, and if a valid resistance per the table below is provided to the RTM remote minimum position input, the OA cfm compensation function will not operate, even if enabled. “Default” is the only possible source for economizer minimum position when using the OA cfm compensation function.

Table 38. Economizer remote minimum position

input resistance

Input Resistance

0 - 30 ohms 0%

30 - 240 ohms

240 - 350 ohms 100%

> 350 ohms

Economizer Min. Position

0-100% (linear)

N/A

RTM Binary Outputs

The RTM has an output with pressure switch proving inputs for the supply fan. There is a 40 second delay from when the RTM starts the supply fan until the fan proving input must close. A fan failure diagnostic will occur after 40 seconds. This is a manual reset diagnostic, and all heating, cooling, and economizer functions will shut down. If this proving input is jumped, other nuisance diagnostics will occur. If the proving input fails to close in 40 seconds, the economizer cycles to the minimum position. This is a manual reset diagnostic. External control of the fan is not recommended.

VAV Drive Max Output

This is a single-pole, double-throw relay rated at a maximum voltage of 24 Vac, two amps. The relay contacts of this relay switch when the unit goes from the occupied mode to the unoccupied mode by means of the occupied binary input. The contacts will stay switched during the unoccupied and morning warm-up mode. They will return to the position shown on the unit wiring diagram when the unit returns to the occupied mode. This binary output signals the VAV boxes or other terminal devices to go full open.

RTM Alarm Relay

This is a single pole, double throw relay rated at a maximum voltage of 24 Vac, two amps max. Relay contacts can be programmed from the unit human interface. This relay can be programmed to pick up on any one or group of diagnostics from the unit human interface.

Status/Annunciator Output

The status annunciator output is an internal function within the RTM module on CV and VAV units. It provides:

• Diagnostic and mode status signals to the remote panel (LEDs) and to the Human Interface.

• Control of the binary alarm output on the RTM.

• Control of the binary outputs on the GBAS module to inform the customer of the operational status and/or diagnostic conditions.

Note: A resistance greater than 350 ohms is assumed to be an

open circuit. The system will use the default minimum position value.

RTM Analog Outputs

The RTM has two 0-10 Vdc outputs: one for the supply fan and one for the economizer option. These outputs provide a signal for one or two damper actuators. There are no terminal strip locations associated with these wires. They go directly from pins on RTM circuit board to actuator motor.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Occupied/Unoccupied Inputs

There are four (4) ways to switch to occupied/ unoccupied:

• Field-supplied contact closure hard wired binary input to the RTM.

• Programmable night setback zone sensor.

• Tracer Summit.

• Factory-mounted time clock.

VAV Changeover Contacts

These contacts are connected to the RTM when daytime heating on VAV units with internal or external

69

CCoonnttrroollss

hydronic heat is required. Daytime (occupied) heating switches the system to a CV unit operation. Refer to the unit wiring diagram for the field connection terminals in the unit control panel. The switch must be rated at 12 mA @ 24 Vdc minimum.

External Auto/Stop Switch

A field-supplied switch may be used to shut down unit operation. This switch is a binary input wired to the RTM. When opened, the unit shuts down immediately and can be canceled by closing the switch. Refer to the unit wiring diagrams (attached to the unit control panel) for proper connection terminals. The switch must be rated for 12 mA @ 24 Vdc minimum. This input will override all VOM inputs, if the VOM option is on the unit.

Occupied/Unoccupied Contacts

To provide night setback control if a remote panel with night setback was not ordered, install a field-supplied contact. This binary input provides the building’s occupied/unoccupied status to the RTM. It can be initiated by a time clock, or a building automation system control output. The relay’s contacts must be rated for 12 mA @ 24 Vdc minimum. Refer to the appropriate wiring diagrams (attached to the unit control panel for the proper connection terminals in the unit control panel.

Emergency Stop Input

A binary input is provided on the RTM board for installation of a field-supplied normally closed (N.C.) switch to use during emergency situations to shut down all unit operations. When open, an immediate shutdown occurs. An emergency stop diagnostic enters the human interface and the unit will require a manual reset. Refer to the unit wiring diagrams (attached to the unit control panel for the proper connection terminals. The switch must be rated for 12 mA @ 24 Vdc minimum. This input will override all VOM inputs, if the VOM option is on the unit.

VAV Box Option

To interlock VAV box operation with evaporator fan and heat/cool modes, wire the VAV boxes/air valves to VAV box control connections on the terminal block.

Supply Duct Static Pressure Control

The RTM relies on input from the duct pressure transducer when a unit is equipped with VFD to set the supply fan speed to maintain the supply duct static pressure to within the static pressure setpoint dead band.

RTM Sensors

RTM sensors include: zone sensors with or without setpoint inputs and modes, supply air sensor, duct static pressure, outside air temperature, outside air humidity, airflow proving, and dirty filter.

Table 39. RTM sensor resistance vs. temperature

Temp °F

-40 346.1 71 11.60

-30 241.7 72 11.31

-20 170.1 73 11.03

-10 121.4 74 10.76

-5 103.0 75 10.50

0 87.56 76 10.25

5 74.65 77 10.00

10 63.8 78 9.76

15 54.66 79 6.53

20 46.94 80 9.30

25 40.40 85 8.25

30 34.85 90 7.33

35 30.18 100 5.82

40 26.22 105 5.21

45 22.85 110 4.66

50 19.96 120 3.76

55 17.47 130 3.05

60 15.33 140 2.50

65 13.49 150 2.05

66 13.15 160 1.69

67 12.82 170 1.40

68 12.50 180 1.17

69 12.19 190 0.985

70 11.89 200 0.830

Resistance

V ohms

Temp °F

Resistance

V ohms

Table 40. RTM setpoint analog inputs

Cooling or Heating

Setpoint Input, °F (using

RTM as zone temp.

source) ohms

40 40 1084

45 45 992

50 50 899

55 55 796

60 60 695

65 65 597

70 70 500

75 75 403

80 80 305

NA 85 208

NA 90 111

Cooling Setpoint Input, °F

(using RTM as supply air

temp. source)

resistance, V

70

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

CCoonnttrroollss

Table 41. RTM resistance value vs. system operating

mode

Resistance applied

to RTM mode input

terminals, ohms

2320 auto off off

4870 auto cool

7680 auto auto auto

10,770

13,320

16,130

19,480

27,930

Note: Mode boundaries are 1000 to 40,000 ohms. Other

boundaries are equal to the midpoint between the nominal mode resistance.

CV Units

Fan

mode

on off

on cool

on auto

auto heat

on heat

System

mode

VAV

Units

System

mode

Compressor Module

(MCM - Standard on all units)

The Compressor module, upon receiving a request for mechanical cooling, energizes the appropriate compressors and condenser fans. It monitors the compressor operation through feedback information it receives from various protection devices.

Human Interface Module—Standard on all Units

The human interface (HI) module enables the operator to adjust the operating parameters for the unit using its 16-key keypad on the human interface panel. The HI panel provides a two line, 40 character, clear language (English, Spanish, or French) LCD screen with unit status information and menus to set or modify operating parameters. It is mounted in the unit’s main control panel and accessible through the unit’s control panel door.

Remote Human Interface Module Option

The optional remote-mount human interface (RHI) panel has all the functions of the unit-mounted version except for service mode. To use a RHI, the unit must be equipped with an optional interprocessor communications bridge (IPCB). Model number digit 32 (=2) indicates if the ICPB was ordered with the unit. If not, contact your local Trane representative to order an ICPB kit for field installation. The RHI can be located up to 1,000 feet (304.8 m) from the unit. A single RHI can monitor and control up to four self-contained units if each one contains an IPCB. The IPCB switches must be set as SW1–off, SW2–off, and SW3–on.

Interprocessor Communications Board

(IPCB - Optional used with the Optional Remote Human Interface)

The Interprocessor Communication Board expands communications from the rooftop unit UCM network to a Remote Human Interface Panel. DIP switch settings on the IPCB module for this application should be; Switches 1 and 2 “Off”, Switch 3 “On”.

Waterside Module—Standard on All Water-cooled Units

The waterside module (WSM) controls all water valves based on unit configuration. In addition, the WSM monitors waterflow proving and the following temperatures:

• Entering water

• Entering air low

• Mixed air

• Entering condenser water

• Refrigerant circuit 3:

– Saturated condenser

– Evaporator frost

• Refrigerant circuit 4:

– Condenser

– Evaporator

Cooling Tower Interlock

To interlock condenser pump/tower with cooling operation, wire the cooling tower to an external 115 volt control power source, to ground, and to control terminal block. Normally open/closed contacts are provided.

Heat Module

The heat module is standard on all units with factoryinstalled heat. It controls the unit heater to stage up and down to bring the temperature in the controlled space to within the applicable heating setpoint. Also, it includes a freezestat, morning warm-up, and heating outputs.

Ventilation Override Module (VOM) Option

The ventilation override module can be fieldconfigured with up to five different override sequences for ventilation override control purpose. When any one of the module’s five binary inputs are activated, it will initiate specified functions such as: space pressurization, exhaust, purge, purge with duct pressure control, and unit off.

Once the ventilation sequences are configured, they can be changed unless they are locked using the HI.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

71

CCoonnttrroollss

Once locked, the ventilation sequences cannot be unlocked.

The compressors and condenser fans disable during the ventilation operation. If more than one ventilation sequence activates, the one with the highest priority (VOM “A”) begins first, with VOM “E” having lowest priority and beginning last.

A description of the VOM binary inputs follows below.

UNIT OFF Sequence “A”

When complete system shut down is required, the following sequence can be used.

• Supply fan—off

• Supply fan VFD—off (0 Hz)

• Outside air dampers—closed

• Heat—all stages—off, modulating heat output at 0 Vdc

• Occupied/Unoccupied output—de-energized

• VO relay—energized

• Exhaust fan (field provided -installed)—off

• Exhaust damper (field provided -installed)—closed

PRESSURIZE Sequence “B”

This override sequence can be used if a positively pressured space is desired instead of a negatively pressurized space.

• Supply fan—on

• Supply fan VFD—on (60 Hz)/VAV boxes— open

• Outside air dampers—open

• Heat—all stages—off, hydronic heat output at 0 Vdc

• Occupied/ unoccupied output—energized

• VO relay—energized

• Exhaust fan (field provided -installed)—off

• Exhaust damper (field provided -installed)—closed

EXHAUST Sequence “C”

With the building’s exhaust fans running and the unit’s supply fan off, the conditioned space becomes negatively pressurized. This is desirable for clearing the area of smoke when necessary; i.e. from an extinguished fire, to keep smoke out of areas that were not damaged.

• Supply fan—off

• Supply fan VFD—off (0 Hz)

• Outside air dampers—closed

• Heat—all stages—off, hydronic heat output at 0 Vdc

• Occupied/Unoccupied output—de-energized

• VO relay—energized

• Exhaust fan (field provided -installed)—on

• Exhaust damper (field provided -installed)—open

PURGE Sequence “D”

This sequence can purge the air out of a building before coming out of unoccupied mode of operation in a VAV system. Also, it can be used to purge smoke or stale air.

• Supply fan—on

• Supply fan VFD—on (60 hz)/VAV boxes—open

• Outside air damper—open

• Heat—all stages—off, modulating heat output at 0 Vdc

• Occupied/Unoccupied output—energized

• VO relay—energized

• Exhaust fan (field provided -installed)—on

• Exhaust damper (field provided -installed)—open

PURGE with Duct Pressure Control “E”

This sequence can be used when supply air control is required for smoke control.

• Supply fan—on

• Supply fan VFD—on (if equipped)

• Outside air dampers—open

• Heat—all stages—off, hydronic heat output at 0 Vdc

• Occupied/unoccupied output—energized

• VO relay—energized

• Exhaust fan (field provided -installed)—on

• Exhaust damper (field provided -installed)—open

NNoottee:: Each system (cooling, supply air, etc.) within the

unit can be redefined in the field for each of the five sequences, if required. Also the definitions of any or all of the five sequences can be locked into the software by simple key strokes at the human interface panel. Once locked into the software, the sequences cannot be changed.

Trane Communications Modules

Lontalk®®/BACnet®® Communication Interface Module

(LCI/BCI - Optional - used on units with Trane ICS™ or 3rd party Building Automation Systems)

The LonTalk/BACnet Communication Interface modules expand communications from the unit UCM network to a Trane Tracer Summit™ or a 3rd party building automation system and allow external setpoint and configuration adjustment and monitoring of status and diagnostics.

The LCI-I (Lontalk) utilizes an FTT-10A Free Topology transceiver, which supports non-polarity sensitive, free topology wiring, which allows the system installer to utilize star, bus, and loop architectures. This controller works in standalone mode, peer-to-peer with one or more other units, or when connected to a Trane Tracer

72

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Tube from low side of Transducer

Pressure Transducer

Ventilation Control Module

Solenoid

Tube from high side of Transducer

Tube from low side of Velocity Ring

CCoonnttrroollss

Summit or a third party building automation system that supports LonTalk.

The BCI-I (BACnet) utilizes the BACnet defined MS/TP protocol as defined in ASHRAE standard 135-2004. This controller works in standalone mode, with Tracer SC® or when connected to a third party building automation system that supports BACnet.

Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy Module

(ECEM - Optional used on units with Statitrac and/or comparative enthalpy options)

The Exhaust/Comparative Enthalpy module receives information from the return air humidity sensor, the outside air humidity sensor, and the return air temperature sensor to utilize the lowest possible humidity level when considering economizer operation. In addition, it receives space pressure information which is used to maintain the space pressure to within the setpoint control band. Refer to

Figure 36, p. 73 for humidity vs. voltage values.

Figure 36. Relative humidity vs. voltage

Figure 37. Velocity pressure transducer/solenoid assembly

Figure 36, p. 73 for a detail view of the velocity

pressure transducer/solenoid assembly.

An optional temperature sensor can be connected to the VCM to enable control of a field installed fresh air preheater.

Also, a field-provided CO the VCM to control CO adjusts the minimum cfm upward as the CO

sensor can be connected to

2

reset. The reset function

2

concentrations increase. The maximum effective (reset) setpoint value for fresh air entering the unit is limited to the system’s operating cfm. Table 42, p. 73 lists the minimum outside air cfm vs input voltage.

Table 42. Minimum outside air setpoint w/VCM

module and Traq™ sensing

Unit

SXWF 20 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 22 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 25 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 29 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 32 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 35 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 38 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 42 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 46 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 52 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 58 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 65 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 72 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXWF 80 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXRF 25 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXRF 29 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXRF 30 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXRF 35 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXRF 40 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXRF 50 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

SXRF 60 0.5 - 4.5 vdc

Input Volts

CFM

6,325-8,500

6,325-9,350

6,500-10,625

8,700-12,325

8,700-13,600

9,100-14,875

9,880-16,150

11,200-17,859

11,960-19,550

14,250-22,100

15,080-24,650

16,900-27,625

18,700-29,800

20,800-29,800

8,700-12,325

8,700-13,600

9,100-14,875

9,880-16,150

11,960-19,550

15,080-24,650

20,800-29,800

Ventilation Control Module (VCM)

((AAvvaaiillaabbllee oonnllyy wwiitthh TTrraaqq™™ ddaammppeerr ooppttiioonn))

The ventilation control module (VCM) is located in the airside economizer section of the unit and linked to the unit’s UCM network. Using a velocity pressure transducer/solenoid (pressure sensing ring) in the fresh air section allows the VCM to monitor and control fresh air entering the unit to a minimum airflow setpoint. See

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Generic Building Automation System Module Option

Generic building automation system module (GBAS) provides broad control capabilities for building automation systems other than Trane’s Tracer® system. A field provided potentiometer or a 0-5 Vdc signal can be applied to any inputs of GBAS to provide following points:

73

CCoonnttrroollss

GBAS Analog Inputs

Four analog inputs that can be configured to be any of the following:

• Occupied zone cooling

• Unoccupied zone cooling

• Occupied zone heating

• Unoccupied zone heating

• SA cooling setpoint

• SA heating setpoint

• Space static pressure setpoint

• SA static pressure setpoint

GBAS Binary Outputs

Five binary outputs to provide diagnostics, signaling up to five alarms. Each of the five relay outputs can be mapped to any/all of the available diagnostics. Each output contains a dry N.O. and N.C. contact with a VA rating of 2 amps at 24 Vac.

GBAS Binary Input

One binary input for the self-contained unit to use the demand limit function. This function is operational on units with a GBAS and is used to reduce electrical consumption at peak load times. Demand limiting can be set at either 50% or 100%. When demand limiting is needed, mechanical cooling and heating (with fieldprovided 2-stage electric heat only) operation are either partially (50%), or completely disabled (100%) to save energy. The demand limit definition is user definable at the HI panel. Demand limit binary input accepts a field supplied switch or contact closure. When the need for demand limiting has been discontinued, the unit’s cooling/heating functions will again become fully enabled.

GBAS Communication (Analog Inputs)

The GBAS accepts external setpoints in the form of analog inputs for cooling, heating, supply air pressure. Refer to the unit wiring diagram for GBAS input wiring and the various desired setpoints with the corresponding DC voltage inputs.

Any of the setpoint or output control parameters can be assigned to each of the four analog inputs on the GBAS module. Also, any combination of the setpoint and/or output control parameters can be assigned to the analog inputs through the HI. To assign the setpoints, apply an external 0-5 Vdc signal to one of the following:

• Directly to the signal input terminals

• To the 5 Vdc source at the GBAS module with a 3wire potentiometer.

NNoottee:: There is a regulated 5 Vdc output on the GBAS

module that can be used with a potentiometer as a voltage divider. The recommended potentiometer value is 1000-100,000 ohms.

The setpoints are linear between the values shown in

Table 43, p. 75. Reference Table 44, p. 75 for

corresponding input voltage setpoints. Following are formulas to calculate input voltage or setpoint. SP = setpoint, IPV = input voltage.

• IIff tthhee sseettppooiinntt rraannggee iiss 5500--9900°°FF::

– IPV = (SP - 50) (0.1) + 0.5

– SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/0.1] + 50

• IIff tthhee sseettppooiinntt rraannggee iiss 4400--9900°°FF::

– IPV = (SP - 40)(0.8) + 0.5

– SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/0.08] + 40

• IIff tthhee sseettppooiinntt rraannggee iiss 4400--118800°°FF::

– IPV = (SP - 40)(0.029) + 0.5

– SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/0.029] + 40

• IIff tthhee ssttaattiicc pprreessssuurree rraannggee iiss 00..0033--00..33 iiwwcc::

– IPV = (SP - 0.03)(14.8) + 0.5

– SP = [(IPV - 0.5)/14.8] + 0.03

• IIff tthhee ssttaattiicc pprreessssuurree rraannggee iiss 00..00--55..00 iiwwcc::

– IPV = (SP)(0.8) + 0.5

– SP = [IPV/(0.8 + 0.5)]

GBAS Demand Limit Relay (Binary Input)

The GBAS allows the unit to utilize the demand limit function by using a normally open (N.O.) switch to limit the electrical power usage during peak periods. Demand limit can initiate by a toggle switch closure, a time clock, or an ICS control output. These contacts must be rated for 12 ma @ 24 Vdc minimum.

When the GBAS module receives a binary input signal indicating demand limiting is required, a command initiates to either partially (50%) or fully (100%) inhibit compressor and heater operation. This can be set at the HI using the setup menu, under the “demand limit definition cooling” and “demand limit definition heating” screens. A toggle switch, time clock, or building automation system control output can initiate demand limiting.

If the cooling demand limit is set to 50%, half of the cooling capacity will disable when the demand limit binary input closes. The heating demand limit definition can only be set at 100%, unless the unit has field-provided two-stage electric heat. In that case, if the heating demand limit is set to 50%, half or one stage of heating disables when the demand limit binary input closes. If the demand limit definition is set to 100%, then all cooling and/or heating will disable when the demand limit input closes.

GBAS Diagnostics (Binary Outputs)

The GBAS can signal up to five alarm diagnostics, which are fully mappable through the setup menu on the HI. These diagnostics, along with the alarm output on the RTM, allow up to six fully mappable alarm outputs.

74

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

CCoonnttrroollss

Each binary output has a NO and NC contact with a rating of two amps at 24 Vac. The five binary outputs are factory preset as shown on the unit wiring diagram (on the unit control panel door). However, these

For a complete listing of possible diagnostics, see the Self-Contained Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01. For terminal strip locations, refer to the unit wiring diagram

for the GBAS. outputs can be field defined in a variety of configurations, assigning single or multiple diagnostics to any output.

Table 43. GBAS analog input setpoints

Control Parameter

Occupied zone cooling setpoint (CV units only)

Unoccupied zone cooling setpoint (CV and VAV)

Occupied zone heating setpoint (CV units only)

Unoccupied zone heating setpoint (CV and VAV)

Supply air cooling setpoint (VAV units only)

Supply air hydronic heating setpoint (VAV units only)

Space static pressure setpoint

Supply air pressure setpoint (VAV units only)

Notes:

1. Input voltages less than 0.5 Vdc are considered as 0.5 Vdc input signal is lost, the setpoint will "clamp" to the low end of the setpoint scale. No diagnostic will result from this condition.

2. Input voltages greater than 4.5 Vdc are considered to be 4.5 Vdc.

3. The actual measured voltage is displayed at the HI.

Signal Range Vdc Setpoint Range °F

0.5 to 4.5 50 to 90°F

0.5 to 4.5 40 to 90°F

0.5 to 4.5 40 to 180 F

0.5 to 4.5 0.03 to 0.30 IWC

0.5 to 4.5 0.0 to 5.0 IWC

Table 44. GBAS input voltage corresponding setpoints

Volts

0.5 50 1.6 60 2.6 70 2.7 80

0.6 51 1.7 61 2.7 71 2.8 81

0.7 52 1.8 62 2.8 72 2.9 82

0.8 53 1.9 63 2.9 73 3.0 83

0.9 54 2.0 64 3.0 74 3.1 84

1.0 55 2.1 65 3.1 75 3.2 85

1.1 56 2.2 66 3.2 76 3.3 86

1.2 57 2.3 67 3.3 77 3.4 87

1.3 58 2.4 68 3.4 78 3.5 88

1.5 59 2.5 69 3.5 79 3.6 89

Temp. °F

Volts

Temp. °F

Volts

Temp. °F

Volts

Input Devices and System Functions

Following are basic input device and system function descriptions used within the UCM network on selfcontained units. Refer to the unit wiring diagrams for specific connections.

Temp. °F

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

75

CCoonnttrroollss

Water Purge

NNOOTTIICCEE

PPrrooppeerr WWaatteerr TTrreeaattmmeenntt RReeqquuiirreedd!!

TThhee uussee ooff uunnttrreeaatteedd oorr iimmpprrooppeerrllyy ttrreeaatteedd wwaatteerr ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ssccaalliinngg,, eerroossiioonn,, ccoorrrroossiioonn,, aallggaaee oorr sslliimmee.. UUssee tthhee sseerrvviicceess ooff aa qquuaalliiffiieedd wwaatteerr ttrreeaattmmeenntt ssppeecciiaalliisstt ttoo ddeetteerrmmiinnee wwhhaatt wwaatteerr ttrreeaattmmeenntt,, iiff aannyy,, iiss rreeqquuiirreedd.. TTrraannee aassssuummeess nnoo rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy ffoorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt ffaaiilluurreess wwhhiicchh rreessuulltt ffrroomm uunnttrreeaatteedd oorr iimmpprrooppeerrllyy ttrreeaatteedd wwaatteerr,, oorr ssaalliinnee oorr bbrraacckkiisshh wwaatteerr..

During the unoccupied mode, water-cooled units will periodically circulate water through the condensers and waterside economizer if the user has enabled the purge function at the HI. The water purge function circulates water to introduce fresh water-treatment chemicals and help prevent water stagnation. The number of hours between each periodic purge, or purge duration, is user-defined at the HI between 1-999 hours. If the periodic purge timer expires while the unit is in occupied mode, it will wait for the next available unoccupied time before initiating water purge. Contrary, if a request for cooling occurs during a purge sequence, purge will terminate and cooling will commence.

Compressor Circuit Breakers

The Scroll Compressors are protected by circuit breakers which interrupt the power supply to the compressors if the current exceeds the breakers “must trip” value. During a request for compressor operation, if the Compressor Module detects a problem outside normal parameters, it turns any operating compressor (s) on that circuit “Off”, locks out all compressor operation for that circuit, and initiates a manual reset diagnostic.

Low Pressure Control

Low pressure (LP) control is accomplished using a binary input device mounted on the suction line, near the compressor. If suction pressure drops to 49 (watercooled), 36 (air-cooled) ± 6 psig, or below, the switch opens.

If the switch is open at start, no compressors on that circuit will operate. They are locked out and a manual reset diagnostic initiates. If the LP switch opens after a compressor start, all compressors on that circuit will stop and remain off a minimum 3 minutes before restarting. If the LP cutout trips four times in the first three minutes of operation, all compressors on that circuit lockout and a manual reset diagnostic initiates.

LP switches close at 74 (water-cooled) and 61 (aircooled)± 6 psig.

Evaporator Temperature Sensor Frostat

The evaporator temperature sensor is an analog input device used to monitor refrigerant temperature inside the evaporator coil to prevent coil freezing. It is attached to the suction line near the evaporator coil with circuits 1 and 2 connected to the SCM/MCM and circuits 3 and 4 connected to the WSM. The coil frost cutout temperature is factory set at 30°F. It is adjustable at the HI from 25-35°F. The compressors stage off as necessary to prevent icing. After the last compressor stages off, the compressors will restart when the evaporator temperature rises 10°F above the coil frost cutout temperature and the minimum three minute “off” time elapses.

Saturated Condenser Temperature Sensors

The saturated condenser temperature sensors are analog input devices. They are mounted inside a temperature well located on a condenser tube bend on air-cooled units, and in the condenser shell on watercooled units. The sensors monitor the saturated refrigerant temperature inside the condenser coil and are connected to the SCM/MCM for circuits 1 and 2 (air or water cooled), and WSM for circuits 3 and 4 (only water-cooled).

Head Pressure Control

Head pressure control is accomplished using two saturated refrigerant temperature sensors on aircooled units and up to four sensors on water-cooled units.

AAiirr--ccoooolleedd uunniittss:: During a request for compressor operation when the condensing temperature rises above the lower limit of the control band, the compressor module (SCM/MCM) sequences condenser fans on. If the operating fans cannot bring the condensing temperature to within the control band, more fans turn on. As the saturated condensing temperature approaches the lower limit of the control band, fans sequence off. The minimum on/off time for condenser fan staging is 5.2 seconds. If the system is operating at a given fan stage below 100% for 30 minutes the saturated condensing temperature is above the efficiency check point setting, a fan stage will be added. If the saturated condensing temperature falls below the efficiency check point setting, fan control remains at the present operating stage. If the fan stage cycles four times within a 10 minute period, the lower limit temperature is redefined as being equal to the lower limit minus the temporary low limit suppression setting. The unit will utilize this new low limit temperature for one hour to reduce condenser fan short cycling.

WWaatteerr--ccoooolleedd:: Units without WSE, the condenser valve modulates to maintain an average saturated condenser temperature. Units with WSE, if economizing and mechanical cooling is necessary the economize valve will sacrifice free cooling and modulate to maintain condensing saturated

76

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

CCoonnttrroollss

temperature. If not economizing, the condenser valve will modulate to maintain condensing saturated temperature. Water-cooled units without head pressure control will lock out mechanical cooling at entering condenser water temperatures below 54°F. Mechanical cooling will resume when the entering condenser water temperature exceeds 58°F.

Low Ambient Control (Air-Cooled Units Only)

The low ambient modulating output on the compressor module is functional on all units with or without the low ambient option. When the compressor module stages up to it's highest stages 2 or 3 depending on unit size), the modulating output is 100% (10 Vdc). When the control is at stage 1, the modulating output (0-10 Vdc) controls the saturated condensing temperature to within the programmable condensing temperature low ambient control point.

Low Ambient Compressor Lockout

Utilizes an analog input device. When the system is configured for low ambient compressor lockout, the compressors are not allowed to operate if the temperature of the outside air falls below the lockout setpoint. When the temperature rises 5°F above the lockout setpoint, the compressors are allowed to operate. The factory preset is 50°F.

Return Air Temperature Sensor

The return air temperature sensor is an analog input device used with a return humidity sensor on units with the comparative enthalpy option. The sensor monitors the return air temperature and compares it to the outdoor temperature to establish which temperature is best suited to maintain cooling requirements. It is mounted in the return air path and connected to the ECEM.

Supply Fan Circuit Breaker, Fuses, and Overloads

The supply fan motor is protected by either circuit breakers fuses or a combination of fuses and overloads, dependent upon unit configuration. Circuit breakers are used on units without a VFD. They will trip and interrupt the motor power supply if the current exceeds the breaker trip value. The RTM shuts all system functions off when detecting an open fan proving switch. Units with a VFD have fuses to protect the VFD and motor. Units with a VFD w/bypass have fuses to protect VFD circuit and overloads to protect the motor when in bypass.

Supply Air Temperature Low Limit

Uses the supply air temperature sensor input to modulate the economizer damper to minimum position in the event the supply air temperature falls below the occupied heating setpoint temperature.

Supply Air Temperature Sensor

The supply air temperature sensor is an analog input device. It monitors the supply air temperature for supply air temperature control, supply air temperature reset, supply air temperature low limiting, and supply air tempering. It is mounted in the supply air discharge section of the unit and connected to the RTM.

Supply Airflow Proving Switches

This is binary input device used on units to signal the RTM when the supply fan is operating. It is mounted in the supply fan section and is connected to the RTM. During a request for fan operation and if the differential switch opens for 40 consecutive seconds, compressor operation turns off, heat operation turns off, the request for supply fan operation turns off and locks out, economizer damper option closes, and a manual reset diagnostic initiates.

Low Entering Air Protection Device (LEATPD)

The low entering air protection device (LEATPD) is a binary input on units with hydronic heat or a waterside economizer. It is optional on water-cooled units.

If the LEATPD is on a unit with factory-installed heat, it is mounted in the heat section and connected to the heat module. If the entering air temperature to the heating coil falls to 40°F, the normally open contacts on the LEATPD close and cause the following events:

• The hydronic heat actuator fully opens.

• The supply fan turns off

• The outside air damper closes

• The SERVICE light at the remote zone sensor option turns on.

• A LEATPD diagnostic displays at the human interface panel.

If the LEATPD is on a water-cooled unit without factoryinstalled heat, it is wired to the WSM. It will trip if the entering water temperature falls to 34°F, open the economizer valve, and energize the pump output.

High Duct Temp Thermostat Option On Units with a TCI

The high duct temperature thermostats are binary input devices used on units with a Trane communication interface module (TCI).They provide a high limit unit shutdown and require a manual reset. The thermostats are factory set to open if the supply air temperature reaches 240°F, or the return air temperature reaches 135°F. Once tripped, the thermostat requires a manual reset. Reset by pressing the sensor’s reset button when the air temperature decreases approximately 25°F below the cutout point.

Filter Switch

A binary input device that measures the pressure differential across the unit filters. It is mounted in the

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

77

CCoonnttrroollss

filter section and is connected to the RTM. A diagnostic SERVICE signal is sent to the remote panel if the pressure differential across the filters is at least 0.5" w. c. The contacts will automatically open when the pressure differential across the filters decrease to 0.4" w.c. The switch differential can be field adjusted between 0.17" w.c. to 5.0" w.c. ± 0.05" w.c.

High Duct Static Switch Option

The high duct static switch is field-mounted in the ductwork or plenums with smoke dampers. It will cause a manual reset diagnostic if the duct static exceeds the pre-set static limit. The static limit is adjustable at the HI.

78

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Pre-Startup

Before starting up units, perform the following procedure to ensure proper unit operation.

Units with VFD

This panel is hinged to allow service access to fan motor and belt drive components that are located behind it.

NNoottee:: The panel weight rating is 225 lbs. total including

factory-installed components.

WWAARRNNIINNGG

PPrrooppeerr FFiieelldd WWiirriinngg aanndd GGrroouunnddiinngg RReeqquuiirreedd!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww ccooddee ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. AAllll ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg MMUUSSTT bbee ppeerrffoorrmmeedd bbyy qquuaalliiffiieedd ppeerrssoonnnneell.. IImmpprrooppeerrllyy iinnssttaalllleedd aanndd ggrroouunnddeedd ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg ppoosseess FFIIRREE aanndd EELLEECCTTRROOCCUUTTIIOONN hhaazzaarrddss.. TToo aavvooiidd tthheessee hhaazzaarrddss,, yyoouu MMUUSSTT ffoollllooww rreeqquuiirreemmeennttss ffoorr ffiieelldd wwiirriinngg iinnssttaallllaattiioonn aanndd ggrroouunnddiinngg aass ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn NNEECC aanndd yyoouurr llooccaall// ssttaattee//nnaattiioonnaall eelleeccttrriiccaall ccooddeess..

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd wwaaiitt ffoorr DDCC ccaappaacciittoorrss ttoo ddiisscchhaarrggee bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. RReeffeerr ttoo tthhee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss rreeccoommmmeennddaattiioonnss ffoorr pprrooppeerr ddiisscchhaarrggee ttiimmee aass DDCC bbuuss ccaappaacciittoorrss rreettaaiinn hhaazzaarrddoouuss vvoollttaaggeess aafftteerr iinnppuutt ppoowweerr hhaass bbeeeenn ddiissccoonnnneecctteedd.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt// ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd bbeeffoorree ttoouucchhiinngg aannyy iinntteerrnnaall ccoommppoonneennttss..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

1. Remove the unit center cover panel to the left of the VFD panel.

2. Verify/remove/discard the sheet metal shipping screws along the top and bottom edges of the VFD panel.

3. Disconnect the communications cable from the keypad on the VFD door panel.

4. Turn the two slotted-head fasteners on the right edge of the VFD panel fully counterclockwise.

5. Pull on the handle to swing the panel 180°.

NNoottee:: To secure the panel in the open position during

service procedures, attach the chain mounted to the cabinet frame behind the unit center cover panel to the chain retainer notch on the edge of the VFD panel.

To close and reattach the panel, reverse the above procedures.

NNoottee:: Verify that all wires are in proper position and

not rubbing once the panel has been secured.

Pre-Startup Checklist

Complete this checklist after installing unit to verify all recommended installation procedures are complete before startup. This does not replace the detailed instructions in the appropriate sections of this manual. Always read the entire section carefully to become familiar with the procedures.

Supply Fan

• Verify the fan and motor shafts are parallel.

• Verify the fan and motor sheaves are aligned.

• Check the fan belt condition and tension. Adjust the tension if belts are floppy or squeal continually. Replace worn or fraying belts in matched sets.

• Ensure the fan rotates freely.

• Tighten locking screws, bearing set screws and sheaves.

• Ensure bearing locking collars do not wobble when rotated.

• Remove fan assembly tie down bolts.

• Ensure fan rotation is in direction of arrow on fan housing. If incorrect, verify incoming power phasing is correct. Switch wires on the fan contact to properly phase fan if necessary.

Ductwork

• Ensure trunk ductwork to VAV boxes is complete and secure to prevent leaks.

• Verify that all ductwork conforms to NFPA 90A or 90B and all applicable local codes

Water-Cooled Unit Piping

• Verify condensate drain, water piping drain plugs, economizer header, and condenser vent plug are installed.

Air-Cooled Units Only

• Verify leak test was performed after refrigerant piping was installed.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

79

PPrree--SSttaarrttuupp

• Verify liquid line filter driers installed.

Units with Hydronic Heat

• Verify the entering water temperature sensor is installed upstream of the hydronic coil.

Units with Electric Heat

• Verify that a zone temp sensor is installed.

Electrical

• Verify electrical connections are tight.

Components

• Verify liquid line service valve, and suction and discharge service valves if present, are open at startup.

NNoottee:: Each compressor suction line contains a low

pressure sensor that will shut the compressor down in low pressure situations. See Table 35, p. 62.

• Ensure system components are properly set and installed.

80

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Startup

WWAARRNNIINNGG

LLiivvee EElleeccttrriiccaall CCoommppoonneennttss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww aallll eelleeccttrriiccaall ssaaffeettyy pprreeccaauuttiioonnss wwhheenn eexxppoosseedd ttoo lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. WWhheenn iitt iiss nneecceessssaarryy ttoo wwoorrkk wwiitthh lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss,, hhaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd lliicceennsseedd eelleeccttrriicciiaann oorr ootthheerr iinnddiivviidduuaall wwhhoo hhaass bbeeeenn pprrooppeerrllyy ttrraaiinneedd iinn hhaannddlliinngg lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss ppeerrffoorrmm tthheessee ttaasskkss..

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww wwiillll ccaauussee tthhee ccoommpprreessssoorr ttoo ooppeerraattee iinn aa vvaaccuuuumm aanndd rreessuulltt iinn ccoommpprreessssoorr ddaammaaggee.. NNeevveerr mmaannuuaallllyy oorr aauuttoommaattiiccaallllyy ppuummpp ddoowwnn ssyysstteemm bbeellooww 77 ppssiigg..

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ccoommpprreessssoorr ddaammaaggee.. KKeeeepp ccrraannkkccaassee hheeaatteerrss oonn wwhheenneevveerr rreeffrriiggeerraanntt iiss iinn tthhee ssyysstteemm.. IIff ccrraannkkccaassee hheeaatteerrss hhaavvee nnoott bbeeeenn oonn wwiitthh rreeffrriiggeerraanntt iinn tthhee ssyysstteemm,, ttuurrnn tthhee ccrraannkkccaassee hheeaatteerrss oonn ffoorr aa mmiinniimmuumm ooff 2244 hhoouurrss bbeeffoorree ssttaarrttiinngg ccoommpprreessssoorrss..

To start the unit, complete the following steps in order.

Review “Preliminary Refrigerant Charging,” p. 41, if applicable. Confirm all steps were completed.

Air-Cooled Only

• Charging is more accurate at higher outdoor temperatures. If outdoor temperature is < 80°F, temporarily disable fan pressure control switches. See unit wiring diagrams and disconnect the wires between switches and terminal strip.

• Do not attempt to charge system with low ambient dampers operating (if applicable). Disable these dampers in “Open” position before proceeding.

• Evaporator load should be at least 70°F return air, 350 CFM/ton.

• Work on only one circuit at a time. See section

“General Data,” p. 14 for compressor sequencing.

NNoottee:: R-410A compressors have belly band crankcase

heaters that must be energized 24 hours before starting compressor. Power to the unit will energize the heaters. Heaters will be energized during the off-cycle as long as the unit has power. Failure to perform these pre-start instructions could result in compressor damage.

1. Verify compressor crank case heaters have been on for at least 24 hours.

2. Make sure all service valves are open.

3. Attach a thermocouple type temperature sensor on liquid line close to liquid line service valve. To ensure an accurate reading, clean line where sensor is attached. After securing sensor to line, insulate sensor and line to isolate it from ambient air.

4. Attach service gauges to suction and discharge ports.

5. Check low side pressure. Low pressure cutout opens below, and closes above, values in Table 35,

p. 62. If the low side pressure is less than the open

psig, refrigerant may need to be added to the suction line before starting the compressor(s) to close the switch. SLOWLY meter into the suction line only as much R- 410A as needed to close the low pressure cutout. Use the VAPOR charging connection. If possible, plan to use this entire refrigerant bottle on the same unit in order to minimize fractionalization. Use an accurate scale to measure and record amount of R-410A added.

6. Switch the field supplied unit disconnect to “OFF”. Open the unit control box and plug in the reset relay for only the circuit being started

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaann nnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. VVeerriiffyy tthhaatt nnoo ppoowweerr iiss pprreesseenntt wwiitthh aa vvoollttmmeetteerr..

7. Turn 115 volt control circuit switch “ON”. Close control box and switch field supplied unit disconnect “ON”. Unit power should be off no longer than 60 minutes to prevent refrigerant migration to compressor sumps. If power is off for longer than 60 minutes, allow time for crankcase heaters to drive refrigerant from compressor sumps before starting compressors.

8. Adjust setpoints at the HI.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

81

SSttaarrttuupp

NNoottee:: Sufficient cooling load must be visible to

refrigerant circuit controls for mechanical refrigeration to operate. If necessary, temporarily reduce the discharge air setpoint to verify the refrigeration cycle operation.

9. Check voltage at all compressor terminals to ensure it is within 10% of nameplate voltage.

10. Check voltage imbalance from these three voltage readings at each compressor. Maximum allowable voltage imbalance, phase to phase is 2%.

11. Start the first step compressor only.

12. Check amp draw at compressor terminals. RLA and LRA are on the unit nameplate.

13. Measure amp draw at evaporator fan motor terminals. FLA data is on the motor nameplate.

14. As soon as a compressor starts, verify correct rotation. If a scroll compressor is allowed to run backwards for even a very short period of time, internal compressor damage could occur and compressor life could be reduced. When rotating backwards scroll compressors make a loud noise, do not pump, and draw about 1/2 expected amps, and low side shell gets hot. Immediately shut off a compressor rotating backwards and correct wiring.

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ccoommpprreessssoorr ddaammaaggee.. IImmpprrooppeerr ppoowweerr pphhaassiinngg wwiillll ccaauussee ccoommpprreessssoorr ttoo rruunn bbaacckkwwaarrddss.. CCoommpprreessssoorr ccoouulldd bbee rruunnnniinngg bbaacckkwwaarrddss iiff iitt iiss nnooiissyy,, llooww ssiiddee sshheellll ggeettss hhoott,, ssuuccttiioonn pprreessssuurree ddooeess nnoott ddrroopp wwiitthhiinn 55 sseeccoonnddss aafftteerr ssttaarrttuupp,, aanndd ccoommpprreessssoorr oonnllyy ddrraawwss ½½ eexxppeecctteedd aammppss.. SSttoopp tthhee ccoommpprreessssoorr iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy aanndd hhaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd eelleeccttrriicciiaann oorr tteecchhnniicciiaann pprrooppeerrllyy ttrraaiinneedd iinn 33 pphhaassee ppoowweerr ccoorrrreecctt tthhee wwiirriinngg..

15. AAiirr CCoooolleedd OOnnllyy: Check condenser fans for proper rotation. From top of unit, correct rotation direction is clockwise. If running backwards, correct wiring.

WWAARRNNIINNGG

RRoottaattiinngg CCoommppoonneennttss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn rroottaattiinngg ccoommppoonneennttss ccuuttttiinngg aanndd ssllaasshhiinngg tteecchhnniicciiaann wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDuurriinngg iinnssttaallllaattiioonn,, tteessttiinngg,, sseerrvviicciinngg aanndd ttrroouubblleesshhoooottiinngg ooff tthhiiss pprroodduucctt iitt mmaayy bbee nneecceessssaarryy ttoo wwoorrkk wwiitthh lliivvee aanndd eexxppoosseedd rroottaattiinngg ccoommppoonneennttss.. HHaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd oorr lliicceennsseedd sseerrvviiccee iinnddiivviidduuaall wwhhoo hhaass bbeeeenn pprrooppeerrllyy ttrraaiinneedd iinn hhaannddlliinngg eexxppoosseedd rroottaattiinngg ccoommppoonneennttss,, ppeerrffoorrmm tthheessee ttaasskkss..

16. After 10 minutes, start second compressor of manifold circuits.

17. Allow 10 minutes for circuit operation to stabilize at full load.

18. Complete charging, if required.

Final Refrigerant Charge

If full charge was not used during installation, follow these steps:

1. Determine remaining charge required by subtracting charge added during “Preliminary

Refrigerant Charging,” p. 41 from the total.

2. With all circuit compressors running, SLOWLY meter remaining R-410A into the suction line from the LIQUID charging connection.

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!

OOvveerrcchhaarrggiinngg ssyysstteemm ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ccoommpprreessssoorr ffaaiilluurree aanndd//oorr rreedduucceedd ccoommpprreessssoorr lliiffee.. DDoo nnoott oovveerrcchhaarrggee ssyysstteemm.. EExxcceessssiivvee rreeffrriiggeerraanntt cchhaarrggiinngg ccaann ccaauussee ccoommpprreessssoorr lliiqquuiidd sslluuggggiinngg aatt ssttaarrttuupp,, aanndd ccoonnddiittiioonnss wwhheerree ccoommpprreessssoorrss aanndd//oorr ccoonnddeennsseerr ffaannss sshhoorrtt ccyyccllee..

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCoommpprreessssoorr DDaammaaggee!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ccoommpprreessssoorr ffaaiilluurree aanndd//oorr rreedduucceedd ccoommpprreessssoorr lliiffee.. TToo pprreevveenntt ccoommpprreessssoorr lliiqquuiidd sslluuggggiinngg,, oonnllyy aadddd lliiqquuiidd iinn tthhee ssuuccttiioonn lliinnee wwhheenn tthhee ccoommpprreessssoorr iiss rruunnnniinngg.. UUssee eexxttrreemmee ccaauuttiioonn ttoo mmeetteerr lliiqquuiidd rreeffrriiggeerraanntt iinnttoo tthhee ssuuccttiioonn lliinnee sslloowwllyy.. IIff lliiqquuiidd iiss aaddddeedd ttoooo rraappiiddllyy,, ccoommpprreessssoorr ooiill ddiilluuttiioonn aanndd ooiill ppuummppoouutt ccoouulldd ooccccuurr..

3. Use an accurate scale to measure and record amount of R-410A added.

4. After unit has been operating for approximately 30 minutes at full load, measure and record operating pressures.

AAiirr CCoooolleedd OOnnllyy: Operating pressure measurement must be made with all condenser fans running.

5. Repeat for other circuits.

6. Confirm, and adjust charge if needed, by checking subooling at AHRI 340/360 full load operating conditions (80/67°F entering evap, ~300CFM/ton, 85/ 95°F EWT/LWT for water-cooled and 95°F OA for air-cooled).

• Water-cooled subcooling should be 8-10°F

• Air-cooled subcooling should be 14-18°F

82

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

SSttaarrttuupp

Startup Procedure

Using the startup log on the following pages, establish nominal conditions for consistent measurements as follows:

• Leaving air greater than 60°F

• Entering air temperature = 70 to 90°F

• Entering water temperature > 60°F

With all compressors running at full load:

1. Compute superheat from the suction line pressure and temperature at the compressor on each circuit. Adjust the thermal expansion valve settings if necessary. Superheat should be between 14 and 20°F.

2. Inspect refrigerant flow in the liquid line sight glass. Flow should be smooth and even, with no bubbles once the system has stabilized.

Unit:

Unit Location:

Unit Voltage

Evaporator fan motor horsepower:

Evaporator fan motor amps:

Evaporator fan rpm (actual):

Evaporator system static (from test and balance report or actual readings)

Evaporator system cfm (test and balance sheet or actual tested):

Supply duct static: Return duct static:

NNoottee:: Sight glass moisture indicator may show

caution or wet at startup. May need up to 12 hours of operation for system to reach equilibrium and correctly show moisture.

Normal startup will occur provided that Tracer™ Summit is not controlling the module outputs or the generic BAS is not keeping the unit off. To prevent Tracer Summit from affecting unit operation, remove Tracer wiring and make required changes to setpoint and sensor sources.

Operating & Programming Instructions

See Self-Contained Programming Guide, PKG-SVP01*EN, for available unit operating setpoints and instructions. A copy ships with each unit. For units with VFD option, see installer guide that ships with each VFD.

Startup Log

Evaporator

Evaporator Air Conditioners (with all compressor operating)

Entering Leaving

Dry-bulb °F: Dry-bulb °F:

Wet-bulb °F: Wet-bulb °F:

Circuit

Circuit A

Circuit B

Circuit C

Circuit D

Circuit E

Circuit F

(a)

Air-Cooled only

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Compressor Amp Draw

A B

(a)

Suction

pressure,

psig

Discharge

pressure,

psig

Superheat Liquid line

pressure,

psig

Sub cooling

°F

83

SSttaarrttuupp

Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C Circuit D Circuit E Circuit F

Entering water temp °F

Leaving water temp °F

Entering water pressure psig

Leaving water pressure psig

Air-Cooled Units (Data taken from outside condensing unit)

Voltage

Amp Draw

Entering air temp °F (Outside condensing unit only)

Leaving air temp °F (Outside condensing unit only)

Refrigerant pressures at condenser, psig

Sub cooling at condenser °F

Water-Cooled Units

84

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Maintenance

Service Access

Access unit controls through the front, top left panel. The panel is secured with two quick- acting fasteners and an automatic latch, which require a screwdriver to remove.

Removable unit panels on the right-hand side provide access to compressors, fan, motor belts, extended grease line fittings, and drive side bearing. On the unit’s left side, removable panels allow access to the expansion valves, filter driers, refrigerant sight glasses, liquid line valves, opposite drive fan bearing, extended grease line fittings, condensers, and waterside economizer control valve.

The compressor, condenser, and fan motor access panels are secured with quick acting fasteners. Fast thread screws secure access panels for economizer coils, evaporator coils expansion valves, water valves, and left fan bearing. Access to other components requires removal of semipermanent panels secured with sheet metal screws. During operation, sight glasses are viewable through the portholes on the unit’s left upper panel.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabbllee ffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinngg ccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorr aalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

The VFD access panel is hinged to allow service access to the fan motor and belt drive components that are located behind it. To swing the panel open:

1. Remove the unit center cover panel to the left of the VFD panel.

2. Remove and discard the sheet metal shipping screws along the top and bottom edges of the VFD panel.

3. Disconnect the communications cable from the keypad on the VFD door panel.

4. Turn the two slotted-head fasteners on the right edge of the VFD panel fully counterclockwise.

5. Pull on the handle to swing the panel 180°.

To close and reattach the panel, reverse the procedures listed above.

NNootteess::

• To secure the panel in the open position during service procedures, attach the chain mounted to the cabinet frame behind the unit center cover panel to the chain retainer notch on the edge of the VFD panel.

• Verify that all wires are in their proper position and not rubbing before replacing the panel.

• Panel weight rating = 225 lbs. total, including factory-installed components.

Air Filters

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabbllee ffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinngg ccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorr aalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

Filter access doors are on the unit’s left side. Filter access for the 2" filter rack on optional steam and hot water coils and airside economizers is also on the left side of the unit. To replace throwaway filters, remove the dirty elements and install new filters with the filter’s directional arrows pointing toward the fan. Verify that no air bypasses the filters. See Figure 38, p. 86 and

Figure 39, p. 86 for proper filter placement.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

85

18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20

20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20

18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20

16 x 20 16 x 20 16 x 20 16 x 20

20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20

18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20 18 x 20

Without steam or hot water coil

With steam or hot water coil

Without hot water or steam coil

25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20

20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20

25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 20

With hot water or steam coil

25 x 20 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 20

20 x 20 20 x 16 20 x 16 20 x 16 20 x 16 20 x 20

25 x 20 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 16 25 x 20

24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 24 24 x 12

Without steam or hot water coil

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

Figure 38. Unit filter sizes and placement for SXWF 20 to 38 tons or SXRF 25 to 35 tons

Figure 40. Unit filter sizes and placement for SXWF 90 to 110 tons

NNoottee:: All filters are 2". These views are from the back of

the unit (L-R).

Inspecting and Cleaning the Drain Pan

Check the condensate drain pan and drain line to ensure that the condensate drains properly at least every six months or as dictated by operating experience.

If evidence of standing water or condensate overflow exists, take steps to identify and remedy the cause immediately. Refer to the troubleshooting section of this manual for possible causes and solutions.

NNoottee:: All filters are 2". These views are from the back of

the unit (L-R).

Figure 39. Unit filter sizes and placement for SXWF 4 to 80 tons or SXRF 40 to 60 tons

NNoottee:: All filters are 2". These views are from the back of

the unit (L-R).

86

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabbllee ffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinngg ccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorr aalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

Clean drain pans using the following procedure:

1. Disconnect all electrical power to the unit.

2. Don the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE).

3. Remove all standing water.

4. Use a scraper or other tools to remove and solid matter. Remove solid matter with a vacuum device that utilizes high efficiency particulate arrestance (HEPA) filters with a minimum efficiency of 99.97% at 0.3 micron particle size.

5. Thoroughly clean the contaminated area(s) with a

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

mild bleach and water solution or an EPA-approved sanitizer specifically designed for HVAC use. Carefully follow the sanitizer manufacturer’s instructions regarding product use.

6. Immediately rinse the drain pan thoroughly with fresh water to prevent potential corrosion from the cleaning solution.

7. Allow the unit to dry thoroughly before putting the system back into service.

8. Properly dispose of all contaminated materials and cleaning solution.

Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabbllee ffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinngg ccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorr aalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

Inspect the fan section every six months or more frequently if operating experience dictates. Clean accumulated dirt and organic matter on the fan interior surfaces using the following procedure:

1. Disconnect all electrical power to the unit.

2. Wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE).

3. Use a portable vacuum with HEPA filtration to remove the loose dirt and organic matter. The filter should be 99.97% efficient at 0.3 micron particle size.

4. Thoroughly clean the fan and associated components with an industrial cleaning solution. Carefully follow the cleaning solution manufacturer’s instructions regarding personal protection and ventilation when using their product.

5. Rinse the affected surfaces thoroughly with fresh water and a fresh sponge to prevent potential corrosion of metal surfaces.

6. Allow the unit to dry completely before putting it back into service.

7. Properly dispose of all contaminated materials and cleaning solution.

Supply Fan

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: On units ordered with a Design Special of

Inlet Guide Vanes, refer to non-current IOM (SCXF-SVX01D-EN) dated on or before March 2008 for maintenance procedure.

Fan Drive

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabbllee ffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinngg ccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorr aalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

Perform the following procedures according to the “Maintenance Periodic Check List”:

1. Rotate the fan wheel to ensure it turns freely in the proper direction and is not rubbing on the fan housing or inlet. If necessary, center the fan wheel again.

2. Check the position of both shafts. Fan and motor shafts should operate parallel to each other for maximum belt and bearing life. Shim as necessary under the motor or fan bearings to obtain proper alignment.

3. Check the fan motor sheave alignment with straight edge or a tightly pulled string. For sheaves of different widths, place a string in the center groove of each sheave and pull it tight for a center line. See

Figure 42, p. 89 for recommended torques.

4. Once the sheaves are properly aligned, tighten sheave set screws to proper torque.

5. Check belt tension. Refer to the “Measuring Belt Tension” section.

6. If required, adjust belt to the minimum recommended tension. Refer to “Adjusting Belt Tension” section.

7. Re-tighten bearing set screws to the proper torques after aligning the sheaves. See for proper torques.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

87

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

8. Check the fan bearing locking collars for tightness on the shaft. To tighten the locking collar, loosen the set screw and slide the collar into its proper position over the extended end of the inner case. Tighten the set screw to the torque value in .

9. During air balancing, verify the sheave alignment, belt tension, and that the shaft is parallel.

Figure 41. Fan shaft and motor sheave alignment

Fan Bearings

The opposite drive end bearing is a special bearing with close tolerance fit of balls and races. Replace this bearing with the same part number as the original bearing.

NNOOTTIICCEE

BBeeaarriinngg FFaaiilluurree!!

DDoo nnoott mmiixx ggrreeaasseess wwiitthh ddiiffffeerreenntt bbaasseess wwiitthhiinn tthhee bbeeaarriinngg aass iitt ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn pprreemmaattuurree bbeeaarriinngg ffaaiilluurree..

Table 45. AO smith bearing lubrication schedule

Speed

Service

Over

1800

rpm

1800 rpm

Note: Service standard - 8 hrs/day, normal to light loading, 100°F

Frame

All

140-180

210-280

320-360

400-440

ambient temp. max. Severe service - 24 hrs/day, shock loading, vibration, dirt or dust, 100°F to 150°F ambient temp. Extreme service - heavy shock or vibration, dirt or dust, 100°F to 150°F ambient temp.

Stand-

ard

Service

6

months

3 yrs 1 yr

2 1/2 yrs

2 yrs

1 1/2 yrs

months

Severe

Service

3

10 1/2

mths

9 mths

8 mths 4 mths

Extreme

months

6 mths

5 1/2 mths

4 1/2 mths

3

Table 46. Compatible with NLGI grade 2 lithium fan

bearing greases

Type

Shell Alvania EP2

Mobile SHC 220

FINA LICAL

Table 47. Compatible with NLGI grade 2 lithium fan

bearing greases

Recommended Grease Recommended Operating

FINA LICAL

Shell Alvania EP2

Mobile SHC 220

Range

20°F to 205°F

Fan Belt Tension

NNoottee:: Check fan belt tension at least twice during the

first days of new belt operation since there is a rapid decrease in tension until belts are run-in.

Proper belt tension is necessary to endure maximum bearing and drive component life and is based on fan brake horsepower requirements. If frayed or worn, replace belts in matched sets.

Measuring Belt Tension

Measure fan belt tension with a Browning, Gates, or equivalent belt tension gauge. Determine deflection by dividing the belt span distance (in inches) by 64. See

Figure 42, p. 89. Use the following procedure to

measure belt tension:

1. Measure belt span between centers of sheaves and set the large “O” ring of the tensioning gauge at 1/ 64 inch for each inch of belt span.

2. Set the load “O” ring at zero.

3. Place the large end of the gauge at the center of the belt span. Press down until the large “O” ring is even with the top of the belt line or the next belt as in Figure 42, p. 89. Place a straight edge across the sheaves as a reference point. See Figure 41, p. 88.

4. Remove the gauge. Note that the load “O” ring now indicates a number on the plunger scale. This number represents pounds of force required to deflect the belt.

5. Check the reading from step 4 against the values given in . If necessary, readjust belt tension.

88

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

Table 48. Fan hub and sheave torques

Unit size

SCWF 20

SCWF 25

SCWF 29

SCWF 32

SCRF 25

SCRF 30

SCWF 35

SCWF 38

SCRF 30

SCRF 35

SCWF 42

SCWF 46

SCWF 52

SCWF 58

SCRF 40

SCRF 50

SCWF 65

SCWF 72

SCWF 80

SCRF 60

SCWF 90

SCWF C0

SCWF C1

Fan

Diameter

18"

20"

25

27

Set Screw

Size

5/16"

3/8"

Torque (ft-

lbs)

12SCWF 22

12

14

24

Adjusting Belt Tension

NNOOTTIICCEE

BBeelltt TTeennssiioonn!!

DDoo nnoott oovveerr--tteennssiioonn bbeellttss aass iitt ccoouulldd rreedduuccee ffaann aanndd mmoottoorr bbeeaarriinngg lliiffee,, aacccceelleerraattee bbeelltt wweeaarr aanndd ppoossssiibbllyy ccaauussee sshhaafftt ffaaiilluurree..

Figure 42. Belt tension gauge (top) and fan belt adjustment (bottom)

To adjust belt tension see Figure 42, p. 89 and perform the following procedure:

1. Loosen bolts A, B, and E on both sides of the sliding motor base. See Figure 43, p. 90.

2. Loosen nuts C and D (as required for motor horsepower) to slide the motor on its mounting plate in the proper direction to tension or relieve tension on the belt.

3. Adjust nuts A-D and bolt E. Do not stretch the belts over the sheaves.

4. Retighten all nuts and bolts.

5. Verify tension is adjusted properly.

Recommended belt tension range values are on the unit fan scroll. To access the fan scroll, face the righthand side of the unit and remove the top left panel. The belt tension label is on the top right-hand corner of the fan scroll. See Figure 43, p. 90

The correct operation tension for a V-belt drive is the lowest tension at which the belt will not slip under the peak load conditions. It may be necessary to increase the tension of some drives to reduce flopping or excessive startup squealing.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

89

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

Figure 43. Location of fan belt label on fan scroll (top) and belt tensioning with fan adjustment points (bottom)

90

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

Figure 44. Right-side view of the self-contained unit

Image Tag Expected within Figure Tag

Figure 45. Fan assembly

compressor failure diagnosis and replacement of scroll compressors.

IImmppoorrttaanntt:: If compressor replacement of a manifold

set is required, DO NOT alter manifold piping. The design is critical to proper refrigerant flow.

40 Ton Air-Cooled Compressor Suction Restrictor Replacement

The 40T air-cooled unit has a manifold compressor set on one circuit. A restrictor in the 10 ton compressor suction connection balances refrigerant flow. Instructions below are for installation if compressor replacement is required.

Figure 46. Restrictor installation

Compressors

Scroll Compressor Failure Diagnosis and Replacement

If compressor failure is suspected, refer to COMSVN01A-EN for detailed information regarding

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

91

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

Refrigerant System

If refrigerant system repair is required, Leak Test, Brazing and Evacuation Procedures are described.

Preliminary charging is described in the Installation– Mechanical section, “Preliminary Refrigerant

Charging,” p. 41 and final charging is described in the

Startup section, “Final Refrigerant Charge,” p. 82.

Ignore Air Cooled Only steps for Water Cooled systems.

Refrigerant systems that have been opened must have filter driers replaced and complete leak test and evacuation before recharging.

Refrigerant Leak Test Procedure

WWAARRNNIINNGG

CCoonnffiinneedd SSppaaccee HHaazzaarrddss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDoo nnoott wwoorrkk iinn ccoonnffiinneedd ssppaacceess wwhheerree rreeffrriiggeerraanntt oorr ootthheerr hhaazzaarrddoouuss,, ttooxxiicc oorr ffllaammmmaabbllee ggaass mmaayy bbee lleeaakkiinngg.. RReeffrriiggeerraanntt oorr ootthheerr ggaasseess ccoouulldd ddiissppllaaccee aavvaaiillaabbllee ooxxyyggeenn ttoo bbrreeaatthhee,, ccaauussiinngg ppoossssiibbllee aasspphhyyxxiiaattiioonn oorr ootthheerr sseerriioouuss hheeaalltthh rriisskkss.. SSoommee ggaasseess mmaayy bbee ffllaammmmaabbllee aanndd oorr eexxpplloossiivvee.. IIff aa lleeaakk iinn ssuucchh ssppaacceess iiss ddeetteecctteedd,, eevvaaccuuaattee tthhee aarreeaa iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy aanndd ccoonnttaacctt tthhee pprrooppeerr rreessccuuee oorr rreessppoonnssee aauutthhoorriittyy..

WWAARRNNIINNGG

EExxpplloossiioonn HHaazzaarrdd!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww ssaaffee lleeaakk tteesstt pprroocceedduurreess bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy oorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr pprrooppeerrttyy--oonnllyy--ddaammaaggee.. NNeevveerr uussee aann ooppeenn ffllaammee ttoo ddeetteecctt ggaass lleeaakkss.. UUssee aa lleeaakk tteesstt ssoolluuttiioonn ffoorr lleeaakk tteessttiinngg..

WWAARRNNIINNGG

EExxpplloossiioonn HHaazzaarrdd!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww tthheessee iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy oorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr pprrooppeerrttyy-oonnllyy ddaammaaggee.. UUssee oonnllyy ddrryy nniittrrooggeenn wwiitthh aa pprreessssuurree rreegguullaattoorr ffoorr pprreessssuurriizziinngg uunniitt.. DDoo nnoott uussee aacceettyylleennee,, ooxxyyggeenn oorr ccoommpprreesssseedd aaiirr oorr mmiixxttuurreess ccoonnttaaiinniinngg tthheemm ffoorr pprreessssuurree tteessttiinngg.. DDoo nnoott uussee mmiixxttuurreess ooff aa hhyyddrrooggeenn ccoonnttaaiinniinngg rreeffrriiggeerraanntt aanndd aaiirr aabboovvee aattmmoosspphheerriicc pprreessssuurree ffoorr pprreessssuurree tteessttiinngg aass tthheeyy mmaayy bbeeccoommee ffllaammmmaabbllee aanndd ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn aann eexxpplloossiioonn.. RReeffrriiggeerraanntt,, wwhheenn uusseedd aass aa ttrraaccee ggaass sshhoouulldd oonnllyy bbee mmiixxeedd wwiitthh ddrryy nniittrrooggeenn ffoorr pprreessssuurriizziinngg uunniittss..

WWAARRNNIINNGG

EExxpplloossiioonn HHaazzaarrdd!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonn bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDoo nnoott eexxcceeeedd uunniitt nnaammeeppllaattee ddeessiiggnn pprreessssuurreess wwhheenn lleeaakk tteessttiinngg ssyysstteemm..

WWAARRNNIINNGG

RR--441100AA RReeffrriiggeerraanntt uunnddeerr HHiigghheerr PPrreessssuurree tthhaann RR--2222!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo uussee pprrooppeerr eeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr ccoommppoonneennttss aass ddeessccrriibbeedd bbeellooww,, ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn eeqquuiippmmeenntt ffaaiilliinngg aanndd ppoossssiibbllyy eexxppllooddiinngg,, wwhhiicchh ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh,, sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy,, oorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt ddaammaaggee.. TThhee uunniittss ddeessccrriibbeedd iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaall uussee RR--441100AA rreeffrriiggeerraanntt wwhhiicchh ooppeerraatteess aatt hhiigghheerr pprreessssuurreess tthhaann RR--2222.. UUssee OONNLLYY RR--441100AA rraatteedd sseerrvviiccee eeqquuiippmmeenntt oorr ccoommppoonneennttss wwiitthh tthheessee uunniittss.. FFoorr ssppeecciiffiicc hhaannddlliinngg ccoonncceerrnnss wwiitthh RR--441100AA,, pplleeaassee ccoonnttaacctt yyoouurr llooccaall TTrraannee rreepprreesseennttaattiivvee..

NNoottee:: These service procedures require working with

refrigerant. Do not release refrigerant to the atmosphere! The service technician must comply with all federal, state, and local laws.

When leak-testing refrigerant systems, observe all safety precautions. Leak test only one circuit at a time to minimize system exposure to potentially harmful moisture in the air.

Field Piping (Air-cooled Discharge and Liquid Lines)

1. Ensure all required field-installed piping pressure tests are completed in accordance with national and/or local codes.

2. Close liquid line angle valve.

3. Connect R-410A refrigerant cylinder to high side charging port (at Remote Condenser or fieldsupplied discharge line access port). Add refrigerant to reach pressure of 12 to 15 psig.

4. Disconnect refrigerant cylinder. Connect dry nitrogen cylinder to high side charging port and increase pressure to 150 psig. Do not exceed high side (discharge) unit nameplate design pressure. Do not subject low side (suction) components to high side pressure.

5. Check all piping joints, valves, etc. for leaks. Recommend using electronic detector capable of measuring 0.1 oz/year leak rate.

6. If a leak is located, use proper procedures to remove the refrigerant/nitrogen mixture, break connections and make repairs. Retest for leaks.

7. Make sure all service valves are open.

92

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

System Repair

1. If system is water cooled with service valves, or air cooled, high and low side may be tested independently by closing liquid line angle valve and water cooled unit discharge line ball valve. Otherwise leave all valves open and DO NOT exceed low side design pressure.

2. Connect R-410A refrigerant cylinder to charging port, add refrigerant to reach pressure of 12 to 15 psig.

3. Disconnect refrigerant cylinder. Connect dry nitrogen cylinder to high side charging port and increase pressure to 150 psig. DO NOT exceed unit nameplate design pressures. If testing complete system, low side design pressure is maximum.

4. Check piping and/or components as appropriate for leaks.

5. Recommend using electronic detector capable of measuring 0.1 oz/year leak rate.

6. If a leak is located, use proper procedures to remove the refrigerant/nitrogen mixture, break connections and make repairs. Retest for leaks.

7. Make sure all service valves are open.

Brazing Procedures

WWAARRNNIINNGG

EExxpplloossiioonn HHaazzaarrdd aanndd DDeeaaddllyy GGaasseess!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww aallll pprrooppeerr ssaaffee rreeffrriiggeerraanntt hhaannddlliinngg pprraaccttiicceess ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. NNeevveerr ssoollddeerr,, bbrraazzee oorr wweelldd oonn rreeffrriiggeerraanntt lliinneess oorr aannyy uunniitt ccoommppoonneennttss tthhaatt aarree aabboovvee aattmmoosspphheerriicc pprreessssuurree oorr wwhheerree rreeffrriiggeerraanntt mmaayy bbee pprreesseenntt.. AAllwwaayyss rreemmoovvee rreeffrriiggeerraanntt bbyy ffoolllloowwiinngg tthhee gguuiiddeelliinneess eessttaabblliisshheedd bbyy tthhee EEPPAA FFeeddeerraall CClleeaann AAiirr AAcctt oorr ootthheerr ssttaattee oorr llooccaall ccooddeess aass aapppprroopprriiaattee.. AAfftteerr rreeffrriiggeerraanntt rreemmoovvaall,, uussee ddrryy nniittrrooggeenn ttoo bbrriinngg ssyysstteemm bbaacckk ttoo aattmmoosspphheerriicc pprreessssuurree bbeeffoorree ooppeenniinngg ssyysstteemm ffoorr rreeppaaiirrss.. MMiixxttuurreess ooff rreeffrriiggeerraannttss aanndd aaiirr uunnddeerr pprreessssuurree mmaayy bbeeccoommee ccoommbbuussttiibbllee iinn tthhee pprreesseennccee ooff aann iiggnniittiioonn ssoouurrccee lleeaaddiinngg ttoo aann eexxpplloossiioonn.. EExxcceessssiivvee hheeaatt ffrroomm ssoollddeerriinngg,, bbrraazziinngg oorr wweellddiinngg wwiitthh rreeffrriiggeerraanntt vvaappoorrss pprreesseenntt ccaann ffoorrmm hhiigghhllyy ttooxxiicc ggaasseess aanndd eexxttrreemmeellyy ccoorrrroossiivvee aacciiddss..

Proper brazing techniques are essential when installing refrigerant piping. The following factors should be kept in mind when forming sweat connections:

1. When heating copper in the presence of air, copper oxide forms. To prevent copper oxide from forming inside the tubing during brazing, sweep an inert gas, such as dry nitrogen, through the tubing. A nitrogen flow of 1 to 3 cubic feet per minute is sufficient to displace the air in the tubing and prevent oxidation of the interior surfaces. Use a

pressure regulating valve or flow meter to control the flow.

2. Ensure that the tubing surfaces requiring brazing are clean, and that the tube ends are carefully reamed to remove any burrs.

3. Make sure the inner and outer tubes of the joint are symmetrical and have a close clearance, providing an easy “slip” fit. If the joint is too loose, the connection’s tensile strength is significantly reduced. Ensure the overlap distance is equal to the inner tube diameter.

4. Wrap each refrigerant line component with a wet cloth to keep it cool during brazing. Excessive heat can damage the internal components.

NNoottee:: Use 40-45% silver brazing alloy (BAg-7 or

BAg-28) on dissimilar metals. Use BCup-6 brazing alloy on copper-to-copper joints.

5. If using flux, apply it sparingly to the joint. Excess flux will contaminate the refrigerant system.

6. Apply heat evenly over the length and circumference of the joint.

7. Begin brazing when the joint is hot enough to melt the brazing rod. The hot copper tubing, not the flame, should melt the rod.

8. Continue to apply heat evenly around the joint circumference until the brazing material is drawn into the joint by capillary action, making a mechanically sound and gas-tight connection.

9. Visually inspect the connection after brazing to locate any pinholes or crevices in the joint. Use a mirror if joint locations are difficult to see.

System Evacuation Procedures

• Each refrigeration circuit must be evacuated before the unit can be charged and started.

• Use a rotary type vacuum pump capable of pulling a vacuum of 100 microns or less.

• Verify that the unit disconnect switch and the system control circuit switches are “OFF”.

• Oil in the vacuum pump should be changed each time the pump is used with high quality vacuum pump oil. Before using any oil, check the oil container for discoloration, which usually indicates moisture in the oil and/or water droplets. Moisture in the oil adds to what the pump has to remove from the system, making the pump inefficient.

• When connecting vacuum pump to refrigeration system, it is important to manifold vacuum pump to both high and low side of system (liquid line access valve and suction line access valve). Follow pump manufacturer’s directions for proper methods of using vacuum pump.

• Lines used to connect the pump to the system should be copper and of the largest diameter that can practically be used. Using larger line sizes with

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

93

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

minimum flow resistance can significantly reduce evacuation time.

NNoottee::

• Rubber or synthetic hoses are not recommended for system evacuation. They have moisture absorbing characteristics that result in excessive rates of evaporation, causing pressure rise during standing vacuum test. This makes it impossible to determine if system has a leak, excessive residual moisture, or continual or high rate of pressure increase due to hoses.

• Install an electronic micron vacuum gauge in the common line ahead of the vacuum pump shutoff valve, as shown in Figure 47, p. 94. Close Valves B and C, and open Valve A.

Start vacuum pump. After several minutes the gauge

reading will indicate the maximum vacuum the pump is capable of pulling. Rotary pumps should produce vacuums of 100 microns or less.

NNOOTTIICCEE

MMoottoorr WWiinnddiinngg DDaammaaggee!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ccoommpprreessssoorr mmoottoorr wwiinnddiinngg ddaammaaggee.. DDoo nnoott uussee aa mmeeggoohhmm mmeetteerr oorr aappppllyy vvoollttaaggee ggrreeaatteerr tthhaann 5500 VVDDCC ttoo aa ccoommpprreessssoorr mmoottoorr wwiinnddiinngg wwhhiillee iitt iiss uunnddeerr aa ddeeeepp vvaaccuuuumm..

NNoottee:: It is unlawful to release refrigerant into the

atmosphere. When service procedures require working with refrigerants, the service technician must comply with all Federal, State, and local laws.

Standing Vacuum Test

Once 300 microns or less is obtained, close valve A and leave valves B and C open to allow the vacuum gauge to read the actual system pressure. Let system equalize for approximately 15 minutes. This is referred to as a “standing vacuum test” where time versus pressure rise. Maximum allowable rise over a 15 minute period is 200 microns. If pressure rise is greater than 200 microns but levels off to a constant value, excessive moisture is present. If pressure steadily continues to rise, a leak is indicated. Figure 48, p. 95 illustrates three possible results of “standing vacuum test”.

If a leak is encountered, repair the system and repeat the evacuation process until the recommended vacuum is obtained. Once the system has been evacuated, break the vacuum with refrigerant and complete the remaining Pre-Start procedures before starting the unit.

Figure 47. Typical vacuum pump hookup

• Open Valves B and C. Evacuate system to a pressure of 300 microns or less. As vacuum is being pulled on system, it may appear that no further vacuum is being obtained, yet pressure is high. It is recommended during evacuation process to “break” vacuum to facilitate evacuation.

• To break the vacuum, shut valves A, B, & C and connect a refrigerant cylinder to charging port on manifold. Purge air from hose. Raise standing vacuum pressure in system to “zero” (0 psig) gauge pressure. Repeat process two or three times during evacuation.

94

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Figure 48. Evacuation time vs. pressure rise

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Pressure in Microns

Time in Minutes

Continously increasing pressure indicates the presence of leaks, moisture, or both.

Initial evacuation pressure.

State of equilibrium indicates the true amount of moisture left in the system. It indicates that no leaks are present and the system is properly evacuated.

State of equilibrium indicates the true amount of moisture left in the system. It indicates that no leaks, but requires further evacuation.

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

Compressors

Scroll Compressor Failure Diagnosis and Replacement

If compressor failure is suspected, refer to COM-SVN01 for detailed information regarding compressor failure diagnosis and replacement of scroll compressors.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

95

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

Components

Figure 49. Typical water-cooled compressor section components

NNoottee:: Tighten bolts to 38 ft. lbs.

96

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

Cleaning Coil Fin

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss CChheemmiiccaallss!!

CCooiill cclleeaanniinngg aaggeennttss ccaann bbee eeiitthheerr aacciiddiicc oorr hhiigghhllyy aallkkaalliinnee aanndd ccaann bbuurrnn sseevveerreellyy iiff ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh sskkiinn oorr eeyyeess ooccccuurrss.. HHaannddllee cchheemmiiccaall ccaarreeffuullllyy aanndd aavvooiidd ccoonnttaacctt wwiitthh sskkiinn.. AALLWWAAYYSS wweeaarr PPeerrssoonnaall PPrrootteeccttiivvee EEqquuiippmmeenntt ((PPPPEE)) iinncclluuddiinngg ggoogggglleess oorr ffaaccee sshhiieelldd,, cchheemmiiccaall rreessiissttaanntt gglloovveess,, bboooottss,, aapprroonn oorr ssuuiitt aass rreeqquuiirreedd.. FFoorr ppeerrssoonnaall ssaaffeettyy rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee cclleeaanniinngg aaggeenntt mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss MMaatteerriiaallss SSaaffeettyy DDaattaa SShheeeett aanndd ffoollllooww aallll rreeccoommmmeennddeedd ssaaffee hhaannddlliinngg pprraaccttiicceess..

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt// ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCooiill DDaammaaggee!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ccooiill ddaammaaggee.. DDoo nnoott cclleeaann tthhee rreeffrriiggeerraanntt ccooiill wwiitthh hhoott wwaatteerr oorr sstteeaamm aass iitt ccoouulldd ccaauussee hhiigghh pprreessssuurree iinnssiiddee tthhee ccooiill ttuubbiinngg.. DDoo nnoott uussee aacciiddiicc cchheemmiiccaall ccooiill cclleeaanneerrss.. AAllssoo,, ddoo nnoott uussee aallkkaalliinnee cchheemmiiccaall ccooiill cclleeaanneerrss wwiitthh aa ppHH vvaalluuee ggrreeaatteerr tthheenn 88..55 ((aafftteerr mmiixxiinngg)) wwiitthhoouutt uussiinngg aann aalluummiinnuumm ccoorrrroossiioonn iinnhhiibbiittoorr iinn tthhee cclleeaanniinngg ssoolluuttiioonn..

• Keep coils clean to maintain maximum performance. For operation at its highest efficiency, clean the refrigerant coil often during periods of high cooling demand or when dirty conditions prevail. Clean the coil a minimum of once per year to prevent dirt buildup in the coil fins, where it may not be visible.

• Remove large debris from the coils and straighten fins before cleaning. Remove filters before cleaning.

• Clean refrigerant coils with cold water and detergent, or with one of the commercially

available chemical coil cleaners. Rinse coils thoroughly after cleaning.

• Economizer and evaporator coils are installed so the evaporator is directly behind the economizer. To clean between the coils, remove the sheet metal block off. Access the block off by removing the corner panels on the left or right rear side of the unit.

• If the refrigerant coil is installed back to back with the waterside economizer coil, use a cleaner that is acceptable for cleaning both types of coils.

Inspecting and Cleaning Coils

Coils become externally fouled as a result of normal operation. Coil surface dirt reduces heat transfer ability and can cause comfort problems, increased airflow resistance and thus increased operating energy costs.

Inspect coils at least every six months or more frequently as dictated by operating experience. Cleaning frequently is dependent upon system operating hours, filter maintenance, efficiency, and dirt load. Following is the suggested method for cleaning steam and hot water coils.

Steam and Hot Water Coils

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt// ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

1. Disconnect all electrical power to the unit.

2. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE).

3. Access both sides of the coil section.

4. Use a soft brush to remove loose debris from both sides of the coil.

5. Use a steam cleaning machine, starting from the top of the coil and working downward. Clean the leaving air side of the coil first, then the entering air side. Use a block-off to prevent steam from blowing through the coil and into a dry section of the unit.

6. Repeat step 5 as necessary. Confirm that the drain line is open following completion of the cleaning process.

7. Allow the unit to dry thoroughly before putting the

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

97

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

system back into service.

8. Straighten any coil fins that may be damaged with a fin rake.

9. Replace all panels and parts and restore electrical power to the unit.

10. Ensure that contaminated material does not contact other areas of the equipment or building. Properly dispose of all contaminated materials and cleaning solutions.

Refrigerant Coils

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt// ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

Draining the Waterside Economizer Coil

NNOOTTIICCEE

CCooiill FFrreeeezzee--UUpp!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww iinnssttrruuccttiioonn bbeellooww ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn eeqquuiippmmeenntt ddaammaaggee.. DDrraaiinn aanndd vveenntt ccooiillss wwhheenn nnoott iinn uussee.. TTrraannee rreeccoommmmeennddss ggllyyccooll pprrootteeccttiioonn iinn aallll ppoossssiibbllee ffrreeeezziinngg aapppplliiccaattiioonnss.. UUssee aa ggllyyccooll aapppprroovveedd ffoorr uussee wwiitthh ccoommmmeerrcciiaall ccoooolliinngg aanndd hheeaattiinngg ssyysstteemmss aanndd ccooppppeerr ttuubbee ccooiillss..

Drain plugs are in the piping below supply and return header for each coil. Use these plugs to drain the coil and piping. When draining the coil, open the vents at the top of the supply and return headers. Also, a drain plug is at the bottom of the inlet condenser manifold and in the outlet pipe near the left side of the unit. Remove these plugs to drain the condensers. Be sure to open the vent plugs at the top of the condenser inlet and outlet manifold. See .

When refilling the condenser/waterside economizer coil system with water, provide adequate water treatment to prevent the formation of scale or corrosion.

Cleaning the Condenser

1. Disconnect all electrical power to the unit.

2. Wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE).

3. Access to the coil section of the unit (both sides).

4. Use a soft brush to remove loose debris from both sides of the coil.

5. Mix a high quality coil cleaning detergent with water according to the manufacturer’s instructions. If the detergent is strongly alkaline after mixing (pH

8.5 or higher), it must contain an inhibitor. Carefully follow the cleaning solution manufacturer’s instructions regarding product use.

6. Place the mixed solution in a garden pump-up sprayer or high pressure sprayer. If using a high pressure sprayer note the following:

• Maintain a minimum nozzle spray angle of 15°

• Spray perpendicular to the coil face

• Protect other areas of the equipment and

internal controls from contact with moisture or the cleaning solution

• Keep the nozzle at least six inches from the coil

• Do not exceed 600 psig

NNOOTTIICCEE

PPrrooppeerr WWaatteerr TTrreeaattmmeenntt RReeqquuiirreedd!!

TThhee uussee ooff uunnttrreeaatteedd oorr iimmpprrooppeerrllyy ttrreeaatteedd wwaatteerr ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ssccaalliinngg,, eerroossiioonn,, ccoorrrroossiioonn,, aallggaaee oorr sslliimmee.. UUssee tthhee sseerrvviicceess ooff aa qquuaalliiffiieedd wwaatteerr ttrreeaattmmeenntt ssppeecciiaalliisstt ttoo ddeetteerrmmiinnee wwhhaatt wwaatteerr ttrreeaattmmeenntt,, iiff aannyy,, iiss rreeqquuiirreedd.. TTrraannee aassssuummeess nnoo rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy ffoorr eeqquuiippmmeenntt ffaaiilluurreess wwhhiicchh rreessuulltt ffrroomm uunnttrreeaatteedd oorr iimmpprrooppeerrllyy ttrreeaatteedd wwaatteerr,, oorr ssaalliinnee oorr bbrraacckkiisshh wwaatteerr..

Condensing water contains minerals that collect on the condenser tube walls. Cooling towers also collect dust and foreign materials that deposit in the condenser tube. The formation of scale or sludge in the condenser is indicated by a decreased water flow, low temperature difference between inlet and outlet water, and abnormally high condensing temperatures. To maintain maximum condenser efficiency, the condenser must remain free of built-up scale and sludge. Clean the condenser either mechanically or chemically.

1. Disconnect all electrical power to the unit.

2. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE).

3. Access both sides of the coil section.

4. Use a soft brush to remove loose debris from both sides of the coil.

98

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

5. Use a steam cleaning machine, starting from the top of the coil and working downward. Clean the leaving air side of the coil first, then the entering air side. Use a block-off to prevent steam from blowing through the coil and into a dry section of the unit.

6. Repeat step 5 as necessary. Confirm that the drain line is open following completion of the cleaning process.

7. Allow the unit to dry thoroughly before putting the system back into service.

8. Straighten any coil fins that may be damaged with a fin rake.

9. Replace all panels and parts and restore electrical power to the unit.

10. Ensure that contaminated material does not contact other areas of the equipment or building. Properly dispose of all contaminated materials and cleaning solutions.

Chemical Cleaning of Condenser and Economizer Coil

Chemical cleaning removes scale deposits built up by minerals in the water. For a suitable chemical solution, consult a water treatment specialist. The condenser water circuit is composed of copper, steel, and cast iron. The chemical supply house should approve or provide all materials used in the external circulating system, along with the quantity of cleaning material, duration of cleaning time, and safety precautions necessary for handling the cleaning agent.

Piping Components

Water Valves

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss VVoollttaaggee ww//CCaappaacciittoorrss!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ddiissccoonnnneecctt ppoowweerr aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. DDiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriicc ppoowweerr,, iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneeccttss aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll mmoottoorr ssttaarrtt//rruunn ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaannnnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. FFoorr vvaarriiaabbllee ffrreeqquueennccyy ddrriivveess oorr ootthheerr eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinngg ccoommppoonneennttss pprroovviiddeedd bbyy TTrraannee oorr ootthheerrss,, rreeffeerr ttoo tthhee aapppprroopprriiaattee mmaannuuffaaccttuurreerr’’ss lliitteerraattuurree ffoorr aalllloowwaabbllee wwaaiittiinngg ppeerriiooddss ffoorr ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss.. VVeerriiffyy wwiitthh aa CCAATT IIIIII oorr IIVV vvoollttmmeetteerr rraatteedd ppeerr NNFFPPAA 7700EE tthhaatt aallll ccaappaacciittoorrss hhaavvee ddiisscchhaarrggeedd..

FFoorr aaddddiittiioonnaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn rreeggaarrddiinngg tthhee ssaaffee ddiisscchhaarrggee ooff ccaappaacciittoorrss,, sseeee PPRROODD--SSVVBB0066**--EENN..

Water valves have a stern packing nut. If there is

evidence of water leakage at the valve stem, proceed as follows:

1. Remove actuator motor from support plate.

2. Remove shaft coupling.

3. Torque the packing nut to 10-ft.-lbs. of torque.

4. Replace shaft coupling.

5. Replace actuator motor.

Flow Switch

Flow switches have a magnet on the vane assembly that attracts ferrous particulate may build up on the magnet to the point that the vane will wedge and not operate properly. When the flow switch does not operate, remove and replace.

Maintenance Periodic Checklists

WWAARRNNIINNGG

HHaazzaarrddoouuss SSeerrvviiccee PPrroocceedduurreess!!

FFaaiilluurree ttoo ffoollllooww aallll pprreeccaauuttiioonnss iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaall aanndd oonn tthhee ttaaggss,, ssttiicckkeerrss,, aanndd llaabbeellss ccoouulldd rreessuulltt iinn ddeeaatthh oorr sseerriioouuss iinnjjuurryy.. TTeecchhnniicciiaannss,, iinn oorrddeerr ttoo pprrootteecctt tthheemmsseellvveess ffrroomm ppootteennttiiaall eelleeccttrriiccaall,, mmeecchhaanniiccaall,, aanndd cchheemmiiccaall hhaazzaarrddss,, MMUUSSTT ffoollllooww pprreeccaauuttiioonnss iinn tthhiiss mmaannuuaall aanndd oonn tthhee ttaaggss,, ssttiicckkeerrss,, aanndd llaabbeellss,, aass wweellll aass tthhee ffoolllloowwiinngg iinnssttrruuccttiioonnss:: UUnnlleessss ssppeecciiffiieedd ootthheerrwwiissee,, ddiissccoonnnneecctt aallll eelleeccttrriiccaall ppoowweerr iinncclluuddiinngg rreemmoottee ddiissccoonnnneecctt aanndd ddiisscchhaarrggee aallll eenneerrggyy ssttoorriinngg ddeevviicceess ssuucchh aass ccaappaacciittoorrss bbeeffoorree sseerrvviicciinngg.. FFoollllooww pprrooppeerr lloocckkoouutt//ttaaggoouutt pprroocceedduurreess ttoo eennssuurree tthhee ppoowweerr ccaann nnoott bbee iinnaaddvveerrtteennttllyy eenneerrggiizzeedd.. WWhheenn nneecceessssaarryy ttoo wwoorrkk wwiitthh lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss,, hhaavvee aa qquuaalliiffiieedd lliicceennsseedd eelleeccttrriicciiaann oorr ootthheerr iinnddiivviidduuaall wwhhoo hhaass bbeeeenn ttrraaiinneedd iinn hhaannddlliinngg lliivvee eelleeccttrriiccaall ccoommppoonneennttss ppeerrffoorrmm tthheessee ttaasskkss..

Monthly Checklist

The following check list provides the recommended maintenance schedule to keep the commercial selfcontained equipment running efficiently.

1. Inspect unit air filters. Clean or replace if airflow is blocked or if filters are dirty.

2. Inspect coils for excess moisture or icing. Icing on the coils may indicate low airflow supply, restricted airflow from dirty fins, evaporator frost protection sensor problems, or a shortage of refrigerant flowing through the coil.

3. Check that condensate from the evaporator and economizer coils flows freely through the condensate piping, traps, drain pan, and drainage holes. Remove algae and or any airflow obstructions.

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

99

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

4. Check the condition and tension of fan belts. Adjust tension if belts are floppy or squeal continually. Replace worn or fraying belts in matched sets.

NNoottee:: Check belt tension and adjust it at least twice

daily the first days of new belt operation. Belt tension will rapidly decrease until the belts are run in.

5. Check the liquid line sight glasses during operation. Bubbles in the sight glasses indicate a possible shortage of refrigerant or an obstruction in the liquid lines, e.g. dirty liquid line filter driers.

6. Inspect filter driers for leaks, flow obstructions, or temperature drop across the filter drier. A noticeable temperature differential, e.g. 5°F, in the liquid line may indicate an obstruction. Replace the filter drier if it appears clogged.

7. Inspect the optional waterside economizer coil. Clean the coil to prevent airflow restrictions through the fins.

8. Check and record operating pressures.

Semi-Annual Maintenance

1. Verify the fan motor is properly lubricated. Follow lubrication recommendations on the motor tag or nameplate. Contact the motor manufacturer for more information.

2. Lubricate fan bearings. For best results, lubricate bearings during unit operation. Refer to the “Fan Bearings” section for recommended grease.

NNoottee:: The bearings are manufactured using a

special synthetic lithium-based grease designed for long life and minimum lube intervals. Over lubrication can be just as harmful as not enough.

3. With power disconnected, manually rotate the fan wheel to check for obstructions in the housing or

interference with fan blades. Remove obstructions and debris. Center the fan wheel if necessary.

4. Check the fan assembly sheave alignment. Tighten set screws to their proper torques.

5. Check water valves for leakage at valve stem packing nut.

NNoottee:: Perform this procedure monthly if the unit is

in a coastal or corrosive environment.

Annual Maintenance

Check and tighten all set screws, bolts, locking collars and sheaves.

1. Inspect, clean, and tighten all electrical connections.

2. Visually inspect the entire unit casing for chips or corrosion. Remove rust or corrosion and repaint surfaces.

3. Visually check for leaks in refrigerant piping.

4. Inspect fan, motor, and control contacts. Replace badly worn or eroded contacts.

5. Inspect the thermal expansion valve sensing bulbs for cleanliness, good contact with the suction line, and adequate insulation from ambient air.

6. Verify the superheat setting is 12 -17°F at the compressor.

When checking operating pressures and conditions, establish the following nominal conditions for consistent measurements.

• Leaving air temperature greater than 60°F

• Entering air temperature is 80 - 90°F

• Entering water temperature greater than 65°F

• Compressors running at full load

• Drain the condensing water system and inspect it thoroughly for fouling; clean if necessary.

100

SCXF-SVX01Q-EN

Trane SCWF 35, SCWF 25, SCWF 42, SCWF 38, SCWF 52 Installation, Operation And Maintenance Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

Overview

R-410A Compressors

Signature Series Self-Contained Unit Components

Standard Controls

Human Interface Panel

Unit Control Module

Figure 2. Right side view of unit Optional Controls

Unit Nameplate

Model Number Description

Commercial Self-Contained Signature Series

Commercial Self-Contained Air-Cooled Condenser

General Data

Pre-Installation

Receiving

Receiving Checklist

Ship-Separate Accessories

Contractor Installation Responsibilities

Unit Inspection

Exterior Inspection

Inspection for Concealed Damage

Repair

Unpacking

Unit Protective Covers

Supply Fan Isolators

Dimensional Data

Steam and Hot Water Coils

Steam Coils

Hot Water Coils

Plenum

Filters

Airside Economizer

Service Clearances

Weights

Installation - Mechanical

Unit Handling

Installation Preparation

Unit Vibration Isolator Option

Unit Isolator Installation Procedure

Duct Connections

Installing the Plenum

Installing the Airside Economizer

Water Piping

Condenser Connections

Condensate Drain Connections

General Waterside Recommendations for Cooling Towers

Waterside Piping Arrangements

Water Piping Verification

Installating the Hydronic Coil

Steam and Hot Water Coil

Water Temperature Requirements

Refrigerant System

Interconnecting Piping

Preliminary Refrigerant Charging

Installation - Electrical

Unit Wiring Diagrams

Supply Power Wiring

Voltage Range

Voltage Imbalance

Phase Monitor

Control Power

Selection Procedures

Static Pressure Transducer Installation (VAV units only)

Transducer Location

Installing the Transducer

Zone Sensor Options for Control Units

Standard with All Units: BAYSENS077

CV Unit Zone Sensor Options

BAYSENS108 and BAYSENS110

Integrated Comfort Systems Sensors for CV and VAV Applications

CV and VAV Unit Zone Sensor Options

BAYSENS074

BAYSENS073

Zone Sensor Installation

Mounting Location

Mounting the Subbase

Wiring